The Students Greek Grammar. GRAMMAE OF THE GKEEK LANGUAGE. .By DR GEOKGE CUETIUS, rBOrESBOE IN THE tTNITEESITY OP LEIPZIG. TRANSLATED UNDER THE REVISION OF THE AUTHOR. EDITED By WILLIAM SMITH, LL.D., OLABSIOAL EXAMIIIES IN THE UNIVEKSITY OF LONDON, AND EDITOB OF THE 0LAS8I0AL AND LATIN DICTI0NAEIE8. For to^^^e qp Colleges a>4^ High - Schools. NEW YORK: HAKPER & BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS, franklin square. 18 7 2. 5^/^J^ f XL EDITOK'S PREFACE. The Greek Grammar of Dj;. Curtius is acknowledged by the most competent scholars, both in this country and in Germany, to be the best representative of the present advanced state of Greek scholarship. It is, indeed, almost the only Grammar which exhibits the inflexions of the lan- guage in a really scientific form; while its extensive use in the schools of Germany, and the high commendations it has received from practical teachers in that country, are suflicient proof of its excellence as a school-book. It is surprising to find that many of the public and private schools in this country continue to use Grammars which ignore all the improvements and discoveries of modern philology, and still cling to the division of*the substantives into ten declensions, the designation of the Second Perfect as the Perfect Middle, and similar exploded errors. Dr. Curtius has stated so fully in his Preface the principles on which this Grammar is constructed, that it is unnecessary to say more by way of introduction. It only remains to add that the translation has been made from the fifth edi- tion of the original work (1862), with the author's sanction, and that the proof-sheets have enjoyed the advantage of his final correction and revision. An abridgment for the use of the lower forms is pub- lished simultaneously with the present work. w. s. London, March. 1863. Su f^ FROM THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE. The fact that within a few years the present Grammar has found its way into a large number of schools in various countries of Europe seems to me a satisfactory answer to the question whether a thorough knowledge of Greek is attainable by the method I have adopted. Much, there- fore, of what I thought it necessary to state on the first appearance of the book does not now require to be repeat- ed; but I consider it incumbent upon me to make some observations upon the objects and the use of the Grammar, •ancT I beg to recommend these to the careful consideration of teachers. Few sciences have within the last half century been so completely reformed as the science of language. . Not only has our insight into the nature and history of human speech been greatly advanced, but— and this is justly regarded as a matter of still greater importance — quite a different method in treating language in general has been discov- ered, after a new era had been opened up by the philo- sophical inquiries of William von Humboldt, and the his- torical investigations of Francis Bopp and Jacob Grimm. No one, unless he desires to exclude schools from the prog- ress thus made, and to confine, them to the mechanical repetition of imperfect and antiquated rules, will probably doubt that the new knowledge, the principles of which have stood the test of nearly half a century, ought to exer- cise its influence on the teachino^ of lano-uasre. If the teaching of a language in our schools is intended VI PREFACE. to lead not only to a thorough understanding of the mas- ter-works of literature, but at the same time to cultivate and stir up the youthful mind by independent exertion, and by occupation with a subject so immensely rich, and so harmoniously quickening the most different mental powers as language, such teaching can not possibly continue to keep aloof from the progress of scientific inquiry, which is, unfortunately, still the case in many places. The teaching of Greek, however, seems to be specially called upon to make a commencement. The modern science of language has, indeed, exercised its influence on every part of gram- mar, but none has been more affected by it than the first, commonly called the accidence. In Latin, scientific in- quiry into the structure of the forms has not yet reached the same completeness as in Greek. The structure of the Latin language is less transparent, and we miss so many aids which we possccS for the Greek in the high antiquity of its literature and in its dialects. A scientific treatment of the structure of the Latin language in schools is, more- over, a matter of great practical difficulty, on account of the early age at which the elements must necessarily be learned. We ought not, however, on this account, to sep- arate the teaching of Latin from all contact with scientific inquiry, the influence of which can show itself with advan- tage, at least, in a more suitable arrangement and distribu- tion of the matter. Granting, therefore, that our boys, as heretofore, must commit to memory a large portion of Latin forms ; granting that the most important object in learning Latin consists, perhaps, more in the acquisition of fixed laws of syntax, which obviously form the principal strength of the Latin language, the case of the Greek is different. ' The Greeks are justly called an artistic people, and the Greek language is the most ancient work of art which they PREFACE. Vll have reared upon a very primitive basis. The student, who approaches the Greek after he has already gone through a considerable preparation by the study of Latin, ought to be impressed with the idea that the structure of this language is one of the most marvelous productions of the intellectual powers acting unconsciously. Every thing lies here clear before us : the sources of our knowledge are more varied, and the necessity of analyzing the given forms is rendered so absolute, even on account of the Homeric dialect, that this analysis has, in fact, never been entirely wanting, and after the first appearance of Buttmann, in 1782, made considerable progress. The attempt, therefore, to connect in a still higher degree the practice of the school with the spirit of science, can here point to numerous precedents ; and it is, no doubt, mainly owing to this cir- cumstance that it has met with so favorable a reception. My object has been to produce a consistent system, a care- ful selection, and a clear and precise exposition, rather than an entirely new system. In selecting and expounding the results of scientific in- quiry, I have always kept in view the idea that the book was intended for practical use in schools. The first requi- site, therefore, was not to admit any thing which is beyond the sphere of the school, to explain only that which is nec- essary, and to admit only that which is absolutely certain ; for a school-book must speak categorically, must exclude all matters of mere opinion, and has no space for discussion and inquiry. It is, however, perfectly indifferent whether a result has been obtained by special researches into the Greek language or by the more general inquiries of com- parative philology. I was farther obliged to admit only those things which find their explanation in the Greek language itself, or at Vlll PKEFACE. most in a comparison with the Latin ; but even within these limits I have confined myself to such innovations as really aiFord an important insight into the structure of the forms, whereas all that belongs to philological learning and many other things have been passed over because they seemed unnecessary. Among such superfluous innovations I include especially all changes of terminology, and the entire alteration of whole parts of grammar which are often still less necessary, but to which formerly too much impor- tance used to be attached. The new technical terms I have introduced have gen- erally been approved of, and the principle stated in my Preface to the first edition, though not followed with pe- dantic consistency, " if possible, to put significant names in the place of dead numbers," as, for e, (/., A Declension, O Declension, instead of First and Second Declension, will scarcely be found fault with, for a name with a meaning at once gives a piece of information, and therefore facilitates learning. Doubts have been raised only about the expres- sions strong and -z^^^^^l', which I have employed to distin- guish the two Aorists and Perfects. I am as well aware now as I was at the first that, from the point of view of scientific inquiry, much may be said against the expressions, but I nevertheless feel that I can not give them up. For the old designation by numbers is unsatisfactory, unless we are prepared for its sake either to sacrifice a more con- sistent arrangement of the verb, or to mislead the pupil by calling the Aorist which is treated of first the second, and first the one with which he is made acquainted afterward. But a common name to distinguish the two forms of the Aorist Active Middle and Passive, and of the Perfect Active, is indispensable in a system of Greek Grammar. An innovation had here become necessary, for both neg^ ative and positive reasons. The expressions strong and weak have this advantage — that, after being introduced by Grimm into his German Grammar, they have also been adopted by English grammarians ; and, though I use them not quite in the same sense, they are easily intelligible. It will surely not be difficult to make a pupil understand that those forms are called strong which spring from the root, as it were, by an internal agency, and loeak those which are formed by syllables added externally, especially as he may easily compare the English tahe^ took, and love^ loved. I still know of no designation which, with so few disadvantages, oifers so many advantages as this, and I shall retain it until a better one is suggested ; and, after all, in necessary innovations, it is often more important that men agree than on what they agree. The fact that the most essential changes I have made in the arrangements of the subjects — as, for example, the strict adherence to the system of Stems in all the inflexions, and especially the ilivision of the verb according to temporal Stems — have met with the approval of practical teachers, has been to me a source of great gratification, it being a clear proof that the demands of scientific inquiry are by no means so much opposed to a right system of teaching as is still imagined by many. The arrangement of temporal Stems is made less upon scientific than upon didactic grounds, in such a manner that kindred forms are joined together, and due regard is paid to the progress from that which is easy to that which is more difficult. The chapter on the formation of words, though somewhat enlarged, has, for the same reasons, still been kept very brief. But, in treating of the verbs, I have directed attention to the formation of verbal nouns : in treating of the verbs of the different classes, I have always directed attention, by a 1* PREFACE. number of characteristic examples, to the application of the different Stems in the formation of words. By this means the learner has an opportunity, during the study of his grammar, of making himself acquainted with a number of words, and I have no doubt that teachers will give their sanction to this arrangement. In regard to Syntax, the positive results of recent lin- guistic inquiries are as yet less numerous. In this part of the Grammar, therefore, I follow the principle of stating the essential idioms of the Greek language with the utmost possible precision and in the utmost logical order. Only in some chapters, especially in that on the use of the tenses, does my system present considerable differences from the usual one. All minute disquisitions, conjectures, and more or less probable theories — among them especially the ever- repeated theory about the original local meaning of the cases, with which I can not agree at all — have been rigor- ously excluded. In this part, also, I have never neglected to compare the phenomena of the Greek language with the corresponding ones of Latin, and occasionally also of En- glish, where this could be done with brevity and advan- tage ; for as the usage of a language must be mainly com- prehended by a feeling of language, I imagine that every appeal to a Latin usage already embodied with our feeling of language, or to an English usage familiar to us from childhood, advances our knowledge much more than philo- sophical definitions or technical terms of vague or various meanings. For the same reason, I every where attach great importance to an accurate translation of a Greek idiom into English or Latin. I need hardly guard myself against the opinion that I considered such a translation to be a philosophical explanation of a linguistic phenomenon. A real explanation is beyond the problem of a Grammar. PREFACE. XI I scarcely need repeat here that the present book is not intended, like an Elementary Grammar, to be committed to memory paragraph by paragraph ; but, in teaching, a suitable selection, according to the degree of the pupil's advancement, should be made by the teacher. By a dif- ference in type I have myself, at least partially, indicated this. It may be remarked in general that the first business every where is that of memory, and only when the actual forms, with the aid of the paradigms, have been committed to memory, analysis may be added. First knowledge, then understanding : this ought to be the leading principle ; but, as I have said in another place, " Memory can neither accurately grasp the great variety of Greek forms nor re- tain them, unless it be supported by an analyzing and com- bining intelligence, which furnishes, as it were, the hooks and cement to strengthen that which has been learned, and permanently to impress it upon the mind." If details learned at different times and carefully committed to mem- ory, during a subsequent repetition variously combine with one another and form various groups ; if, then, many things, at first sight strange, appear to the pupil in the light of a law pervading the language, such insight is certainly not a mere support of memory, but animates the desire to learn, and incites to exercise the power of thought in a variety of ways. The present book offers to teachers abundant opportunities for such exercises, and acquires its highest efficacy under the guidance of thinking teachers who are truly familiar with it, and take a delight in its subjects. That the book has actually found such teachers has been proved to me in various ways, and caused me sincere grat- ification. G. C. TABLE OF CONTENTS. INTRODUCTION. THE GREEK LAI^GUAGE AND ITS DIALECTS. FIRST PART.— ETYMOLOGY. I. Letters and Sounds. CHAPTER I. THE GREEK CHARACTERS. A.Letters § 1-9 B. Other Characters 10-16 C. Accents 1 7-23 D. Punctuation 23 CHAPTER II. THE SOUNDS. A. The Vowels 24-29 B. The Consonants 30-34 CHAPTER III. COMBINATIONS AND CHANGES OF SOUNDS. A. Vowels in Combination 35-39 B. Other kinds of Vowel Changes 40-43 C. Consonants in Combination with one another 44-54 D. Other Changes in the Middle of a Word 55-62 E. Changes of Sound at the End of a Word •. 63-69 CHAPTER IV, DIVISION OP SYLLABLES AND THEIR QUANTITY. A. Division of Syllables 70-73 B. Quantity 74-78 CHAPTER V. ACCENTS 79-99 XIV CONTENTS. II. Inflexion. A. Inflexion of Nouns and Pronouns. CHAPTER VI. declension of substantives and adjectives. First Principal (or Vowel) Declension. A. The A Declension §112-113 {commonly called the First Declension?) 1. Feminines 114-119 3. Masculines 130-123 B. The O Declension 134-131 {commonly called tJie Second Declension.) Attic Declension 133-133 Second Principal (or Consonant) Declension 135-143 {commonly called the Third Declension.) 1. Consonant Stems : a. Guttural and Labial Stems 144-145 6. Dental Stems 146-149 c. Liquid Stems 150-153 2. Vowel Stems : a. Soft Vowel Stems 154-158 h. Diphthong Stems 159-161 c. O Stems 163-163 3. Stems suffering Elision : a. Sigma Stems 164-167 5. r-Stems 168-169 c. r-Stems 170-171 Irregularities in Declension 174-177 Case-like Terminations •. 178-179 CHAPTER VII. OTHER INFLEXIONS OF THE ADJECTIVE. A. Gender .*. 180-191 B. Comparison 193-300 C. Adverbs of Adjectives 301-304 CHAPTER VIII. INFLEXION OF PRONOUNS 305-319 CHAPTER IX. THE NUMERALS 320-234 CONTENTS. XV B. Inflexion of Verbs. General Remarks §225-230 LIST OF PAEADIGMS. Tabic. Elfiijlam -.- I. Synopsis of Xv w, Iloose (exhibiting the meanings of the Tenses) II. VERBS IN Q. A. Vowel Stems : 1. Uncontracted, Xuw .'. . III. 2. Contracted, Tiixdoj, ttoiew, dovXou) .- IV. B. Consonant Stems : 1. Guttural Stems, TrXkw, ^eyyw, rdaffu) V. 2. Dental Stems, ^pivdofiai, ttciOw, KOfiiK(o VI. 3. Labial Stems, 7r£/i7rw, Xei'ttw, KaXinrTio VII. 4. Liquid Stems, dspcj, dyyeXXw, cnrdpio VIII. VERBS EN MI. First Class, tLOijui, didiofit, 'larrjin IX. Second Class, Mkwhi X. CHAPTER X. FIRST PRINCIPAL CONJUGATION, OR VERBS IN Q. I. The Present-Stem : A. Inflexion of the Present-Stem : . . . § 231-233 B. TheAugment 234-242 C. Contracted Verbs 243-244 D. Distinction of the Present -Stem from the Verbal Stem 245-253 n. The Strong Aorist-Stem 254-257 m. The Future-Stem 258-266 IV. The Weak Aorist-Stem 267-271 V. The Perfect-Stem 272 1. Perfect Active 276-282 2. Pluperfect Active -• 283 3. Perfect Middle and Passive 284-289 4. Pluperfect Middle and Passive 290-2^1 VI. Forms of the Strong Passive Stem 292-295 VII. Forms of the Weak Passive Stem 296-299 Verbal Adjectives 300 Verbs which leave their Stem- Vowel short 301 XVI CONTENTS. CHAPTER XI. SECOND PRINCIPAL CONJUGATION, OR VERBS IN MI. Preliminary Remarks § 302-304 1. First Class 305-317 2. Second Class 318-319 CHAPTER XII. IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION . 320-327 Anomalies in Signification 328-330 Outlines of the Accentuation of Verbal Forms 331-333 Peculiar Verbal Forms of the Ionic Dialect 334 D.-338 D. III. Derivation. CHAPTER XIII. A. Simple Berivatwes 339-340 1. The most important Suffixes for forming Substan- tives 341-349 2. The most important Suffixes for forming Adjectives. . 350-352 3. Derivative Verbs 353 B. Compound Derivatives ': 1. Form of the Combination 354-358 2. Meaning of Combination 359-360 SECOND PART.— SYNTAX. Preliminary Remarks 361 CHAPTER XIV. NUlteER 'and GENDER 362-367 CHAPTER XV. THE ARTICLE 368-391 CHAPTER XVI. . USE OF cases: A. Nominative • 392-393 B. Vocative 394 C. Accusative 395-406 D. Genitive 407-428 E. Dative 429-443 CONTENTS. XVll CHAPTER XVII. THE PREPOSITIONS § 444 General View of the Prepositions . 448 1. Prepositions which take only One Case 449-457 2. Prepositions which take Two Cases 458-461 3. Prepositions which take Three Cases 462-468 CHAPTER XVIII. THE PRONOUNS 469-475 CHAPTER XIX. THE KINDS OF VERBS 476-483 CHAPTER XX. USE OF THE TENSES 484 1. The forms for the Incomplete Action 486-491 2. The forms for the Indefinite (Aorist) Action 493-498 3. The Future 499-501 4. The forms for the Complete Action 502-506 CHAPTER XXr. USE OF THE MOODS. A. In Simple Sentences : 1. Indicative 507 2. Subjunctive 508-513 3. Optative 514-517 4. Imperative 518 B. In Compound Sentences : Connexion of Sentences with one another 519-524 1. Dependent, Declarative, and Interrogative Sentences 525-529 2. Sentences expressing a purpose. 530-533 3. Conditional Sentences 534-550 4. Relative Sentences 551-555 5. Temporal Sentences 556-558 CHAPTER XXII. THE INFINITIVE. 1. Use of the Infinitive in general 559-566 2. The Case of the Subject and Predicate with the Infinitive 567-572 3. The Infinitive with the Article 573-574 4. The Infinigve with av 575-576 5. THe Infinitive instead of the Imperative 577 XVlll CONTENTS. CHAPTER XXIII. ON PARTICIPLES. 1. Attributive Use § 578 2. Appositive Use 579-583 3. The Participle with an Absolute Case 584-586 4. Supplements to Participles 587-588 5. The Predicative Participle 589-594 6. The Participle with av 595 7. Verbal Adjectives 596 CHAPTER XXIV. SOME PECULIARITIES IN RELATIVE SENTENCES.. 597-605 CHAPTER XXV. INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES 606-611 CHAPTER XXVI. THE NEGATIVES. 1. Use of Simple Negatives. 612-618 2. Several Negatives combined 619-621 3. Some Negative Phrases 622 CHAPTER XXVII. THE PARTICLES. A. Conjunctions 623 1. Copulative Conjunctions 624-625 2. Disjunctive " 626-627 8. Adversative " 628-630 4. Comparative " 631-682 "'5. Declarative " 683 6. Temporal " 634-685 7. Causal " 686 8. Inferential « 687 9.Final " 638 10. Hypothetical " 689 11. Concessive " 640 B. Emphatic Particles 641-643 Page English Index - - . . 353 Greek Index - 357 THE STUDENT'S GREEK GRAMMAR. raTRODUCTION. THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND ITS DIALECTS. The Greek language is the language of the Ancient Hellenes (^EXXr^veg), the inhabitants of Greece, with all its islands and numerous colonies. It is related to the languages of the Indians, Persians, Romans, Slavonians, Lithuanians, Germans, and Celts. These are all sister- languages, and together form the Indo-European family. The Greeks were early divided into races, each of which spoke a different dialect. The chief dialects of the Greek language are the ^olic, Dorfc, and Ionic. At first each race employed its own dialect both in poetry and in prose. 1. The Ionic dialect was spoken by the Ionic race, es- pecially in Asia Minor and Attica, in numerous islands, and in the Ionic colonies. It was the first of the dialects developed by poetry, and produced three diiferent but nearly related dialects, viz. : a) The Old-Ionic or JE^pic dialect, which is preserved in the poems of Homer and Hesiod as well as of their fol- lowers. h) The New-Ionic dialect, which we know chiefly from the history of Herodotus. Ob8. — The Old and New Ionic dialects are also designated by the common name lonic^ as distinguished from the Attic. c) The Attic dialect, in which are written the numerous works in poetry and prose produced at Athens in the time 2 INTRODUCTION. of her glorj. The principal writers of the Attic dialect are — the tragedians ^schylus, Sophocles, Euripides, the comic writer Aristophanes, the historians Thucydides and Xenophon, the philosopher Plato, the great orators Lysias, Demosthenes, and ^schines. Through the importance of Athens in Greece, and the excellence of the Attic lit- erature, the Attic became the chief dialect of the Greek language. Obs. — A less important distinction i^ made between the earlier and later Attic writers. .The tragedians and Thucydides belong to the earlier Attic, and the remaining authors to the later. The language of Plato is intermediate between the two : that of the tragedians has also many other peculiarities. 2. The ^OLic dialect was spoken by the 2Eolians, par- ticularly in Asia Minor, Boeotia, and Thessaly. Alcaeus and Sappho wrote in this dialect. 3. The Doric dialect was spoken by the Dorians, chief- ly in Northern Greece, in the Peloponnesus, in Crete, and in the numerous Doric colonies, especially Sicily and Lower Italy. Doric is essentially the dialect of Pindar's lyric poems and* Theocritus's bucolics (herdsman's poetry). The choruses in the tragedies also contain some Doric forms. 4. After Athens ceased to be the leading city in Greece, the Attic dialect still remained the language of educated Greeks. But it soon began to degenerate from its primi- tive purity and excellence, and thus, from the third century before Christ, the common Greek dialect {{] koivyj ^laXtKroc) was distinguished from the Attic. On the boundary-line between the older Attic and the common Greek dialect stands the great philosopher Aris- totle. Among later authors, the most important are — the historians Polyhius^ Plutarch^ Arrian, Dion Cassitts ; the geographer Strabo ; the rhetoricians Dionysius of Hali- carnassus and Lucian. ^^ 0^ Tfl-i ItriTIVBESIf 1 ETYMOLOGY. I. LETTERS AND SOUNBS. Chap, . L- -The Greek Characters. ' . A. Letters, « § 1. The Greek letters are. the following: Large Character. Small Character. Name. Pronunciation. A a > Alpha a (short or long). B ft Beta b. r y Gamma g- A 8 Delta d. E £ Epsilon e (only short). Z z Zeta z. H V Eta e (only long). e e Theta th. I I Iota I (short or long). K K Kappa k. A X Lambda 1. M /^ Mu i m. ■ N V Nu '; n. iS I Xi X. o Omikron o (only short). n TT Pi P- p 9 Rho r. s (^y q Sigma s. T T Tau t. Y V Upsilon •B (short or long). i> Phi ph. X X Chi eh. ^ ^ Psi ps. a tJ Omega o (only long). 4 LETTERS. § 2. § 2. For 5 there is a double sign in the small character: o- at the beginning and in the middle, and g at the end of a word. Hence (rvv, aeiw, ^cav, but rrovog, Kepag. In compound words g may also stand at the end of the first word in the compound : wpog-Epxofjiai, ^vg-j^arog. § 3. From the names of the first two letters arose the expression " Alphabet." The characters of the Greek al- phabet do not essentially differ from those of the Latin and of modern languages. All come from the alphabet of the Phoeilicians. In regard to pronunciation, the following points are to be observed: § 4. All Greek letters are always pronounced alike. But 7 is an exception, since, before y, k, x^, or ^, it is pronounced n^. Hence in Latin it is represented by n : Tiyyb) is pronounced tengo ; o-uy/caXw, synghalo ; \6y\r\y longchl; (^top^iy^, jphorminx. § 5. ? is pronounced like the English z. It is of very different origin in different cases. Compare imdZwv (for fiiyiwv) from fiiyag ; ^wyoy with Latin jugum, English "goke^ etc. § 6. ^ we pronounce as f, but probably the Greeks pro- nounced the J9 and h separately ; hence pJi^ not f^ is used in Latin for 0: (luXocro^iaf jphilosojphia ; ^LXoKT^rrig, Phi- loctetes. § 7. we pronounce like the English th. § 8. Of the diphthongs, ai and u are both pronounced as ei in height ; oi, as oy in l>oy ; au, as ou in sour ; ov, as ou in tour ; vi, as wi in wing; ev and rjv, as eio vs\ few. The iota subscriptum {underwritten) is not pronounced in § 3. Dialects, ^The Greek language had in the most ancient times another letter, /, which was called Digamma (^t'yaft/xar=" double gam- ma") from its form, and Vau {Pav) from its pronunciation. It was pronounced like the Latin ti : Polvog, wine z=zltat. vinum. At a later time it was written only by the ^olians and Dorians. § 14. OTHKK Cn^}^.^^^^^^ a, rjy to. It is not written under, but after capitals, as At, Hi, £2<, but still remains unpronouncecl. § 9. When two vowels, usually pronounced together, are to be pronounced separately, the latter has over it a diaere- sis (Smt/o£o-fc'=<^^i>«^««^^'^^): thus TTuig is pronounced ^<2-^>/ avTTvog, a-iojpnos. B. Other Characters. § 10. Besides the letters, the Greek language has also the sign ', which is placed over the initial vowel to which it belongs, and represents the h: e^ is pronounced hex; aira^, hapax. This sign is called spirit us asper, "rough breathing." § 11. For more exact distinction, the Greeks also mark those initial vowels which have not this breathing with the sign \ i. e., the sjpiritus lenis, " gentle breathing." This sound indicates only the raising of the voice which is nec- essary for the pronunciation of a vowel when no consonant precedes : Ik is pronounced eJc ; ayw, ago. § 12. In diphthongs the breathing stands over the second vowel: ovToq — hoittos ; ei^ov = eidon. But when the first vowel is in large character, the breathing stands before it : "AiZriQ= Hades; '£li^fi=Ode. § 13. Every initial p has the spiritus asper over it: /oai//(j)Soc> f'ivfj.a. In Latin the aspirate is written after the p : rhapsodies, rheuina. When two /o's come together in a word, ' is usually placed over the first, and ' over the second : Wvppoq — Pyrrhus ; KaWippor] = CalUrrhoe. Obs. — Many write tlie double q without any breathing: TlvppoQ\ KaXKippuT], § 14. As in Latin, so in Greek, the sign ~ over a vowel denotes that the vowel is long, "^ that it is short, and - that it is sometimes one, sometimes the other. In Greek they are used only with the vowels a, /, v, since f, rj, o, w, are distinguished by their form. 6 ACCENTS. § 15. § 15. The sign ' at the junction of two words indicates the omission of a vowel or diphthong, and is then called an wpostroj)he : irap Ikeivi^ for irapa eKdvoj, with that one/ jLiri ^yu) for fxri syw (ne ego). § 16. The same sign has the name coronis (Kopwvig) when it stands over the junction of two words contracted into one : tovvojulu for to ovofia, the name / Kayadog for icat ayaOog, and good. It indicates that a crasis {Kpamg, mixtu7'e) or contraction of two words has taken place, and, like the breathing, stands over the second vowel of a diph- thong : TavTo for to auro, the same. C. Accents. § 17. The Greeks also indicate the tone or Accent (wpogij^^ia) of words. The sign ' over a vowel is called the acute accent {b^ua irpogi^dia), that is, the sharp or raised tone : Xoyog, rourwy, wapa, htpog. The syllable thus marked must be raised above the rest. A word having the acute accent upon the last syllable is called oxytone (o^vtovov): irapa y uiri, (damXevg. A word having the acute accent upon the last but one is called paroopyto?ie {TrapoE,vTovov) : Xiyio, (l>aiv(jJ. A word having the acute accent upon the last but two is called proparoxytone (TrpoTrapo^vTOvov) : XiytTai, uTrtTe § 18. Obs. — A proparoxytone, having a long vowel or diphthong in the second syllable of the word, ought to be pronounced so as to give the accent on the third syllable, and yet preserve the length of the second syllable : jSefBijKa should be pronounced hebeka ; cLTTofSaive, apohaine. § 19. The sign ' over a vowel is called the grave accent {fiapua TTpogoj^ia). It indicates a low tone, that is, that a syllable is not raised in tone. Thus in airoj^alvt, the last two might have the grave accent. The marking of them, however, would be superfluous, the absence of the acute being a suiBScient guide. All Avords without an § 23. PUNCTUATIOX. 7 accent on the final syllable are therefore called harytone {^apvTOva) : Xeyw, trepog. § 20. The sign \ however, also denotes a subdued acute, and occupies the place of an acute in every oxytone not immediately followed by a pause : otto, from^ but aTro TovTovyfrom this; (^amXevg^a kijig,hutj5a(n\svQ lyivtro, he hecame king. Oxytones, therefore, retain their accent unchanged only at the end of a sentence. § 21. The sign " over a vowel is called the circuwflex accent (Trt/oto-Trw/ztyrj irpoqui^ia), from its shape. The cir- cumflex is a combination of the acute and the grave, '\ A word having a circumflex on the last syllable is called jperisjyoinenon {irspKrirwiui^vov) : ayaOoTg, crKiag. A word having a circumflex on the last syllable but one is called properispome?ion (TrpoTrEpicrirwiuLevov) : ^cOyt, § 22. In diphthongs, the accent, like the breathing (§ 12), is put over the second vowel : (pavyei, tovto. When the circumflex accent and the breathing meet upon the same vowel, the accent is placed over the breathing: ovTog, riOogf "^Qrog. The acute, in a similar case, stands to the right of the breathing : aye, ip\ofiaif "Iwv. Obs. — The acute is placed between tlie two points of a diaeresis (9), aXhoQ^ but tlie circumflex over them, irpaisvai. i D. Punctuation. § 23. For the purpose of dividing sentences and periods, the Greeks employ the comma and the full-point. For the sign of interrogation they use the semicolon : rt uirag ; what did yoio say 9 For the colon or semicolon they place a point at the upper part of the line : Ipiortj vfiag ' Ti iTTonjaaTE ; I ask you : what did you do f kairipa i]v ' TOTS rjXOev ayyeXog, it was evening ; then a messenger came. 8 VOWELS. § 24. Chap. II. — The Sounds. A. The Vowels. § 24. The Greek language, like the Latin, has ^nq^ vow- els, of which the first four are like the Latin, a^ e^ o, i. But instead of the Latin u, the Greeks have v (pronounced nearly like the French u and the German it). § 25. The vowels, apart from the distinction of long and short, are divided into two classes — the hard and the soft vowels : a, 6, r?, o, w, are hard ; v, i, soft. § 26. From the union of hard and soft vowels together arise di/phthongs {^i(l)Ooyyoi, i, e., double-sounds). They are: av, from a and v. ov, from o and v. Of, " o " I. 27. The union of long hard vowels with i produces the ■> ti a a I, s (( t a V. » a £ (( ^ § 24. Dialects.'— The Dialects, in many words and forms, admit dif- . ferent vowels from those usual in the Attic dialect. Thus : 1. The Ionic (Epic and New-Ionic) dialect prefers rj for Attic d : Att. Oojpd^, Ion. Oiopi]^, hreastplate ; Att. dyopa^ Ion. dyopri^ mcirket ; Att. vavQ^ Ion. vr]VQ^ ship ; but Ion. iiwa\i^p'n] for Att. fiE(Tt]fil3pia, mid- day. 2. The Boric^ on the contrary, prefers d : Att. dtjfiog, Dor. ddfiog, people ; Att. /xrjrijp, mother, Dor. ixdrjjp (comp. Latin mdter) ; Dor. 'AQdva for 'A9r]vd, goddess Athena, even in Attic poets. 3. The Ionic dialect often changes e to «, and o to ov : Att. ^hog. Ion. ^tivog, foreign ; At. 'ivsKa, Ion. uveku, on account of; Att. ]idvog, Ion. fiovvog, alone ; Att. ovofia, Ion. ovvo/xa, name. Rarely o to oi, or a to at : Att. riyvoTjae, lon. -qyvohim, he Tinew not. § 26. Dialects. — The Kew-Ionic dialect has moreover the diphthong wu, which, however, only comes in place ,of av in the other dialects. Oojvfia for Oav/na, iDonder ; tiovrov for iavrov, of himself : ojv must be pronounced as ou. § 33. CONSONANTS. 9 spurious diphthongs a, r?, (j>, in which the underwritten iota is not heard. (Compare § 8.) § 28. The Greek language also combines v with i, but only before vowels: fivla, a fly. § 29. We farther distinguish the obscure o-sound (o, w), the medium a-sound (a), and the clear e-sound (t, t^), and the more obscure v from the clearer i. m B. TJie Consonants. § 30. The consonants are divided : I. According to the position in the mouth where they are produced, i. e., according to their organ {opyavov, " instrument"), into : 1. Gutturals (throat-sounds), k, 7, x* 2. Dentals (teeth-sounds), r, S, 0, v, X, p, o-. 3. Labials (lip-sounds), tt, /3, 0, ji. § 31. II. According to ihe'ir power, that is, whether they can be pronounced with or without a vowel, into ; § 32. 1. Mutes (mutaa) : (a.) hard (tenues), k, t, tt. ih.) soft (mediae), 7, S, /3. {c.) aspirated (aspirata?), x, 0, (p. Ohs. — The aspirated consonants contain each a 7iard consonant with the rough breathing, % therefore = k' (kh) ] 9=zr (th) ; 0= X (ph). § 33. 2. Vocals (semivocales) : (a.) Liquids (liquida)), X, p. {h.) Nasals (nasales), 7 (7 before gutturals, § 4), v, fi, {c.) Sibilant (sibilans), o- (c). § 32. Dialects. — In the Ionic dialect the aspirates often lose the breathing : Uko^xui for Attic ^kxo^ai^ accept ; avnc, for Attic avQiQ^ again. The New-Ionic sometimes transposes the breathing : KiQuiv for Attic xiTh}v., tunic ; IvOev-ev for Attic evreuOev. A2 10 VOWELS IN COMBINATION. § 34. § 34. The dovhle consonants belong to both kinds : 5, ;//, 2 : for ^ = k(j, ■^ — tto-, 2 = ^, with a soft sibilant (§ 5). Obs. — K(s only occurs in compounds with k: tKawKio, I rescue. Chap. TIL— Combinations and Changes of Sounds. A. Vowels in Combination. 35. In the inner part of a word not all vowels may § 34. Dialects. — A peculiarity of the Greek language is the want of the breathing v. The v^ however, was not altogether wanting ; for — 1. The digamma (§ 3, D.) occurred in the Homeric dialect in the beginning of the following words : dywixi, Ireak ; liXiQ^ numer- ous ; aXitTKoixai, am caught; dva^, ruler ; dvatrauj, rule; dv^dv(>y^ jjlease ; dpaide, tender; drrrv, city; tap, spring [««?']; tBvoQ, swarm, people ; tiKom, twenty [Doric PiKan, Latin 'viginti]', eIku), yield; €»\w, p7'ess ; eKTjTi, icillingly ; tKvpog, father-in-law ; tKwv, willing; tXTrojuai, hope; the pronominal Stem i (to, sui), toiKu, appear; iirog, icord ; eIttov, spoTce ; tpyov, worh ; tpyoj, close in; tppu), go on; Ipvcj, draic ; ipku), shall say ; iaQriQ, clothing; el/jia, dress (Stem Peg, Latin vestis) ; trrjg, relative; tiSvg, agreeable; "iXiog, city Ilios ; laog, equal; oIkoq, house; olvog, wi7ie (pimim). On the operation of the digamma, see § 63, D., 75, D. 2. The / in the middle occurred in o{g, sheep, from oPig (Latin ovis) : vr}-6g,ofthe ship, from vdPog (Latin nams). Gen. of vav-g. 3. The Dorians and JGolians retained the digamma at the begin- ning of many words : ^ol. Pkrog, year. Dor. Pi^wg, own. 4. In Homer, at the beginning of many words, e stands for P. te, him, self; luKoai, ticenty ; itar}, equal; tedvov, marriage-gift =^ 'i^vov. § 35. Dialects. — The Dialects vary much in regard to the combi- nations of vowels. The £Jpic and New-Ionic leave many syllables uncontracted : tv = eu, icell ; dtofiai =z olofiai, I thinTc ; Trd'ig =. Traig, doy ; voog = vovg, sense; (piXkrfTe =z ipiXijTs (ametis) ; uskcdv =z dKwv, Some of the forms usually uncontracted are, on the ^ 37. VOWELS IN COMBINATION. 11 combine. The dissimilar vowels pair Avith one another best: 1. The soft generally remain unchanged before the hard vowels : ao<^ia, vnsdom / Xvw, I loosen / \avw, I slumfiber j vu^ it rains ; ivvoia, benevolence. 2. Hard vowels hefore soft ones become diphthongs : £u, 6u, good ; iraigy Traig, l)Oy ; yivu, yivei, to trie race, Ohs. — Diphthongs sometimes lose tlieir second part before vowels : ^ov-6q becomes j3o-6g (hov-is) ; Kai-oj^ kol-o), hum. Compare §§ 160, 248, Oh. § 36. Similar (§ 25) vowels can not well stand together, and hence, when they meet, are often contracted according to the following laws : 1. Two similar vowels melt into one long vowel : \aag becomes Xaq, stone j ZrjXow, ZrjXu), T a7n zealous; Xiiog, XToc, (^ Chian ; (piXirjre, (piXriTE, ametis, in which cases g and rj, o and w, are similar. Still it must be observed that e f usually become u, and o o become ov : Trofee, ttoUi, do / ttAooc, ttXcuc, passage hy sea. Vowels before a similar one beginning a diphthong disappear: ttXoov, tt\ov, of a passage ; oiKiu, oiku, dwells ; ^i\iyy (l)iXy, arnet. § 37., 2. Dissimilar vowels form a compound in which contrary, contracted in these dialects: IpoQ^^upog^ lioly ; (idxjagzzz (Sonffag, one wlw has called. 2. The abbreviation in the diphthongs ending in v is explained by this letter first becoming P, and then being quite dropped (compare § 34, D., 2) : ^ov-6g—(ioP-6g [hov-is]— (io-6g.- § 37. Dialects. — 1. The Dialects supply many exceptions. Thus, in New-Ionic especially, eo and eov are contracted into ev, not into ov : TToisofiev, TToieujufv, we make ; Trodovm, Troievm, they make. 2. In the Ionic dialect, ao (rjo) often changes to ew : 'Arps/^ao, 'ATpeL- de(o, of Atrides ; 'iXaog, 'iXeajg, merciful, a before w is often changed into the thinner sound e : TlocraSewv = UotreLddiov, Att. UoaEidiov, the god Poseidon. 3. In Doric, ao^ au), are contracted into d : 'ATpddao =z 'Arpeica, Uo- (Kiddojv ■=. Xlotrei^dv, Q(.do)v (dearum) = Q^dv. 12 VOWELS IN COMBINATION. 38. a) the obscurer vowel overpowers the clearer (§ 29). Thus from ao comes (X) m Tifxaofiev^ TinojfiEv, we honor. vujSvvog, painless, aiduj, pudorem. Kr}Xu)Te, ye may de jealous. yevovQ, of the race. tr]\ov, be jealous, tlldr), song. Tifio), he honored, fiiov, surely not. Xpy(Tov, of the golden. Xpvool^ the golden. KnKoig^ thou art jealous. olvovQ, abounding in wine. ■when the ti rejDresents the lengthening of « § 38. h) When the medium a-sound and clearer e-sound meet, the first in order gains the upper hand : T]0 a (t) ' vri-odvvog oa u U) ' aiSoa, or] u • v, unwilling. art " a ' TlfldtJTE, Tifidre, honoretis. aei " ^ ' d£(^W, ^dit), I siiig. ay " ?f ' rifidyg, rifi^g, honores. Ea »7 ' *>, r)p, spring. eai " ^ ' Xveai, Xvy, thou art loosened. vat " y ' XuTjat, Xvy, solmris. Obs. — In the contractions of an and eai, sometimes ai takes the place of ^, €1 that of y. So from deiKrjg, unjit, comes alicfjg ; from deipo), I lift up, comes alpu) ; from Xveat comes Xvei (with Xvy). Exceptions, §§ 130, 183, 243 (nfidv), 244. § 39. Another mode of treating vowels which meet to- gether is called Synizesis {GvviZ,r]Gig, i. e., sinking). It con- sists in the first vowel being written but not pronounced as a vowel : Qz6q — as one syllable. § 39, Dialects. — Synizesis is frequent in Homer, especially after t : UrjXrfiddeu), of Felides ; xp^<^^oig, aureis ; vea,navem; also TroXiag, cities ; uySoog, the eighth. § 43. OTHER VOWEL CHANGES. 13 B. Other Tcinds of Vowel changes. § 40. Another change of the vowels consists in their being lengthened. Two kinds of lengthening are distin- guished, viz. : 1. Organic lengthening^ i. e., that which is required by inflexion or derivation. By organic lengthening — a generally becomes »/, rt/zaw, / Jumor, Fut. n/tz/trw. always " w, ^r]\6(x)^ I am jealous, " KijXuxru). € " " rj, TTodu), I TUaJce, " Troirjau). 1 either " 7, riio, I Jionor, " rro-w ; or " £1, St. Xltt, Pres. XetTrw, I leave : sometimes " oi, " Xitt, Adj. Xoi-koq, remaining, V either " i", Xya», / loose, Fut. \v(r^>) ; or . " tv, St. 0yy, Pres. -ixa " ypdfifia, letter, from ypd-(TO} " ypuTT-ffio, written ypdxpco, I shcdl write, from ypdcp-aj, I write. Obs. — It is clear from § 34 that every k and tt with . TrevO-aofxai " Treiaofiai^IsMUsu^er, " " 7r€v0, Pres. 7ra. Ods. 1. — j/r disappears, without compensation, in the Dat. Plur. of Stems of Adjectives in svr, Nom. ei-g : St. xapt€i/r, Nom. x«|Otetc, Dat. Pkir. xapte-cri for xajOtevr-fri. 2. — Of j/0 before or, v remains in 'iXfiiv-g, tape-icorm, instead of t\- jxivQ-g, Stem tXfiivO : Tipw-g^ the city Tiryns^ instead of 'Ti.pvvQ-Q^ Stem TipvvO. § 505. In later Attic a is readily assimilated to a preceding p : Old Att. x^pf^ovr], / call togeth£r^ becomes o-yy/caXew. cvv-xpovoQ^ contemporaneous^ " crvyxpovog. tv-TTupog^ experienced^ " t/xTreipog, from Iv and te7 pa, 2^'oof [so in-peritus becomes im-peritus]. tv-\//vXOf , inspirited, " tfx\pvxog, from tv and ^wx*)? ^^^• ev-jxerpog, metrical, " tfifierpog, from tv and fthpov, measure [so in-modicus becomes im-raod- icus]. avv-peoj, IJiow together, " avppaio, from auv and psw, I flow [so con-ruo becomes cor-ruo]. avv-Xeyu), I collect, " o-yXXeyw, from cruv and Xeyw, / p'a^A^r [so con-ligo becomes col-ligo]. 0&8. 1. — V in the preposition Iv remains unchanged before p : tv- pvBfiog, rhythmical. 2. — V is combined with p by means of ^ in av-^-p6g. Gen. of dvj7|0, man. So is /[* Avith p by /3 in nEcrij/x-li-pia, midday, instead of HS(Tr}fi(e)pia (jieffog and rjfiepa, compare" § 61, c). § 51. Dialects. — In the Epic dialect j3 is often inserted between ft and p, and between p, and X : pk-p.-^-\ioKa, I Imxe gone, from Stem /loX, by metathesis (§ 59). /* before X or p becomes /3 at the beginning of a word : j3Xw-(t/cw, / go, Present of the Stem poX ; (Sporog, mortal, for UpoTog, from the Stem fxpo or /iop \mor-ior, mortuus sum'l. 18 CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. § 52. § 52. 8, Hard mutes (tenues) unite with a following rough hreathmg (spiritus asper) into aspirates (x, Q, (p) : hence^ t-rr' (fcTTi) and rjfiepa, day, become e, Pres. OdTTToj^Ihury, Fut. 6d\l/io, Aor. Pass. trd^TjVj Subs. ^ TUipdc, grave. Tpez=zTrapiQEro,put before; dTnrefi^pet^z aTroTrtfi^pei, will send away; KardavCiv = KaraOavelv, die. § 65. Dialects. — Crasis in Homer is very rare, but very frequent in the Attic poets: e. g., ov^ = 6 l^, KwdvpsTai = Kal oSvpsTai, and laments; S)va^ ■=■ u) ava^, Icing ; ^wttocoi = koL ottoooi, and how many. — Herod. a>XXoi=oi aXKoL, the rest. The loss of a short initial vowel is sometimes indicated by the apostrophe (§ 15): firi yw r= /x^ tyw, ne ego; ijdii 'Upx^'rai = i]Sr) lUpx^T^^h ^^ ^ already coming out. 24 SYNIZESIS. § 66, whole, by the laws given for contraction (§ 36-39). It occurs chiefly after forlns of the article, of the relative pronoun (especially 6, quod, and a, quce), after the prep- osition TTpo, for, hefore, Latin pro, and the conjunction Kaiy and. The syllable produced by crasis is necessarily long. The sign of crasis is the coronis (§ 16) : rayaOa, bona, from ra ayaOa ; raXXa, from ra aXXa, the other things; Tovvofia, the name, from ro ovofxa ; ravro, the same, for to Obs. 1. — The rourepared. On the designation of words according to the accent, see §§ 17, 19, 21. * § 80. 2. There are two kinds of accents, the sharp ac- cent or the ctciote (o^eta), and the lengthened or the cir- cumflex {7r£pi(nrwij.ivri), On the mode of using both, see §§ 17, 21. § 81. 3. The acute may be upon long or short syllables, the circumflex only upon such syllables as are long hy nature: ^?>,\iywylsay; \i]yijj,I cease ; Ka\6q,heautiful j a\r\QnQ,true ; avOpwirog, man/ Ktifxevog, lying / KtLTat,he lies; (Tbjfiafhody; ev,welL § 82. 4, The acute accent can be only on one of the last three syllables, and on the last but two only when the last is short : clttolkoq^ colonist,h\it not airoiKov (Gen.); tXeyov^ I said, but not tXcyrjv, I was said, § 83.» 5. The circumflex can be only on one of the last two syllables, and on the last but one only when the last is short by nature: avKov,flg,h\xt not gvkov (Gen.); awfia^ 'body, but not atofiaTog (Gen.) ; irpa^ig, act, but not irpa^u^ (Norn. Plur.). Obs. 1. — When the last syllable is long by position, it does not hinder the circumflex from being on the last syllable but one : avXdK, furrow, Gen, avXdicog, but it does when it is long by na- ture as well as by position : 9Mpd^, h^east-plate, Gen. Qwpdicog. Com- pare § 145. 2. Exceptions to 4 and 5 will be adduced separately in the chap- ters on inflexions. It is specially to be observed that most of 30 ACCENTS. § 84. the exceptions occur with the final syllables in at and oi : ajroiKoij although 01 is long ; yvtofiai, opinions ; TvnT^Tai^ he is struck. Com- pare §§ 108, 132 D. 3, 133, 157, 229, 268. § 84. 6. A last syllable but one, when long by nature, can have no other accent but the circumflex if the last is short by nature: (^>^vye,flee,i\oi (pevye; rtpxov, I reigned, not i]pxov ; ^Xt ?, of the same age, not riXi^ (Ge«. r'lXiKog) ; KparXvog, not Kparivog. It may, however, be without an accent : elire, speak / avOpomog, 7nan. Obs. 1. — Apparent exceptions, such as wore, so that, iy^e, this, are ex- jilained in § 94. • 2. So fixed is the rule, apart from these cases, that the quantity of the final syllable, or of the last but one, may often be inferred from the accent: Wi (t), ffo ; Trpwra [ prima, 'Nom.FluT.] (a); yv- vaiKUQ (a), women, Ace. Plur. ; yvwixag (a), opinions, Ace. Plur. § 85. 7. Compound words have the accent on the last part but one of the word, as far as is possible according to § 82, etc. : airiOi, go away ; a(ln\oq, friendless ; (juXoywog, friendly to women / aTroSoc, gi've hack / iraptvOec, put in hesides. (Compare § 359, Ohs. 2.) § 86. The accent of a word is variously altered by the changes which a word undergoes, as well as by the con- nexion of a word with others in a sentence. That is : 1. Every oxytone subdues its sharp tone when followed by another word, so that the grave takes the place of the acute. (Compare § 20.) § 87. 2. In a contraction in the middle of a word, the syllable produced by contraction acquires no accent if none of the syllables to be contracted had it : jLveog, ye- vovg, of the race ; rifiak, Tina, honor. The accent of a con- tracted last syllable but one is manifest of itself from the general rules on accent; hence rifiCiVT^gy honoring (Nom. Plur.), from Tiij,aovTeg,TiiuiwvT(i)v (Gen. Plur.), from Ti/maov- rwv (according to §§ 83 and 84). A contracted final syl- lable has § 91. ACCENTS. 31 d) the circumflex, when the first of the imcontracted syllables was accented : rifxaei, rijuia, lie honors / \pv(yiovy Xpvaov, of golden ; • V) the acute, when the last was accented ; laTawq, iaruyq, standing. § 88. 3. With elision (§ 64), oxytone prepositions and conjunctions entirely lose their accent ; all other kinds of words throw it upon the previous syllable as acutes : W avTt[}, on /mn = eTr\ avrc^ ; ouS' l^vvafn]v , I could not even=z ov^e b^vvdiurjv; u^i '0^v(Tavg,Iam Odysseus — uixi 'OSuctevc; t-KT riaav, there were seven — iina y]j)Ose ; pa (apa), then; Hom. dr)v, truly; irep,very; and Se (meaning to- ward, and as a demonstrative appendage). Compare § 212. § 93. These words throw their accent back on the pre- ceding word, in the following manner : a) A preceding oxytone leaves its sharp tone unsubdued (§ 20), and this then serves also for the enclitic : a'^a^ov Ti, something good ; avrog (prjcriv, he himself says. h) After Siperispome the accent of the enclitic is entirely lost : opw Tivag, I see some ; vo lariv, it is well ; ti/uw \). Obs.-^ovxi-, a more emphatic oy, is always accented. § 98. Atona receive the accent only in two cases, viz. : a) when they are at the end of a sentence, and ^Jierefore have no following word on which they can rest : <^?7c ») ov ; do you say so or not f so always wc when placed after the word with which a comparison is made: ^eoc wg,liJce a god, Horn. ; h) when followed by an enclitic, which throws back its accent : ov (firjcn, he says not. Compare § 93, c, § 99. The following particles are distinguished accord- ing to the accent : »i, tha7i, or, and ^, truly, or interroga- tive, Lat. num / apa, then, consequently, and apa as an in- terrogative ; vvVf now, and enclitic vv{v), now, particle of transition ; ojg, how, and log, so / ovkovv, therefore, and ouKouv, not therefore. § 100. DECLENSION. 35 II. IISTFLEXIOK A. INFLEXION OF NOUNS AND PRONOUNS. Chap. YI. — Declension of Substantives and Adjectives. § 100. Inflexion is the change which nouns, pronouns, and verbs undergo to indicate their relation in a sentence. A distinction must be made in inflexion between Stem and Termination. Stem is the fixed part, Termination the changeable part which is appended to the Stem to in- dicate the different relations. The inflexion of nouns and pronouns is called Declen- sion. As the nominal and pronominal Stems are modified according to Cases, the terminations added to them are called Case-endings. The form which arises from a case- ending being added to a Stem is called the Case-form. Thus TTpayiiaT-oQ is a case-form of the Stem rrpayfiar, formed by means of the case-ending -oc. Great care must be taken not to confound the Stem and the Nominative case. The Nominative is itself a case- form, often quite different from the Stem. Thus the Nom- inative of the Stem irpayfiar is irpayfxa, thing. Aoyoc, speech, is the Nominative of the Stem X070, which appears, for example, in the compound word \oyoypd(l)o-g, a loriter of speeches.* The Greeks distinguish in the Declension : 1. Three Numhers : the Singular for one, the Dual for two, the Plural for several; 2. Five Cases : Nominative, Genitive, Dative, Accusa- tive, Vocative. The Dual has only two case-forms, one for the Nom., Ace, and Yoc, the other for the Gen. and Dat. In the Plur., the Yoc. is always like the Nom. 3. Three Genders : Masculine, Feminine, Neuter. * The Stem will always be left unaccented. 36 GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. § 101. § 101. The gender is known : 1. From certain general characteristics of sex, in which the Greek language almost entirely coincides with the Latin. Besides the rule founded in the nature of things, that the designations of male persons are masculine, those of females feminine, the following rules are to be observed : § 102. a) The names of rivers and winds (gods of rivers and winds), and Tnonths (6 ixi]v, the month), are masculine : 6 Evpwrag, the River Eurotas j 6 Zf^ujooc, the west wind j 6 'E/caro^jSatwv, the month Ilecatombceon. § 103. h) The names of t7'ees, lands (17 yf/, the land), islands {y\ vfjo-oc, the islaTid), and most cities^ are femi- nine : 7} ^pvg,the oak; i] ' ApKalia, Arcadia ; 17 AeVjSoc, the island of Leshos / /? KoXo^wv, the city of Coloj)hon. Most abstract substantives also, i. e.^ those which denote a condition, relation, act, or property, are feminine : 17 iXirig, hope / 17 viKti, mctory ; 17 BiKaiocrvvr^f righteousness ; 17 rax^rrjc, quickness. § 104. c) Many names o^ fruits are neuter : to ctvkov, the fig ; most diminutives also, both of masculine and feminine words : ro yepovriov, dimin. of 6 yeptov, the old man / ro yvvaiov, dimin. of r) yvvi), l^^ vsoman. Farther, every name and word which is adduced merely as a word : to avOpMirog, the name '' man f'' to ^iKaiocrvvt}, the idea of righteous- ness f'' and the names of the letters, to aXcpa, to my pa. § 105. 2. From the ending of the Stem the gender is known according to §§ 113, 125, 137-140. 3. In Declension, the Neuter may be distinguished from the Masculine and Feminine, Jbr all Neuters have a) no Accusative or Vocative distinct from the Nom. h) no g as case-sign of the Nom. Sing. c) the ending a in Nom. Ace. and Yoc. PI. § 106. The Greek language, like the English, employs the definite Article. The forms of the Article are the following : 109. ACCENT IN DECLENSION. 37 Masc. Fern. Neut. Singular. Nom. V TO the. Qen. TOV Trig TOV of the. Bat. Ti^ ■^y T(^ to the. Ace. TOV Trjv TO the. Dual. N.A. TOJ TO. or Thi TU) the. G.D. Tolv TCLIV or TOlv TOXV of or to the. Plural. Nom. 01 ai ■ ^^ TOi the. Gen. tG)V TUIV tCjv of the. Bat. toIq Toig TO~ig to the. Ace. TOVQ Tag TO. the. The following general rules on accentuation apply to all the declensions of substantives. § 107. a) The accent remains unaltered on the syllable on which it stood in the Nominative as long as the gen- eral laws of accent allow : avOptoTroQ, man, avOpwire (Yoc.) ; avKoVfJig, (TVKa (Nom. Plur.). Exceptions, §§ 121 and 142, 181,2. h) But when the original accentuation becomes impos- sible by the length of the final syllable or by increase at the end, the accent is shifted only as near to the end of the word, and is changed only as much, as is absolutely neces- sary : avdpisJTToq, onan, avQpwirov (Gen. Sing.), avOpcjiroig (Dat. Plur.) ; (rCojuaf hody, awfiaTog (Gen. Sing.), cTMjuaTCJv (Gen. Plur.) ; tcTxoc, wall, rsixovg (Gen. Sing.). § 108. c) The terminations oi and at are not considered long in regard to accent ; hence avOpwirot, yvtojuai (yvw^r?, opinion). ^§ 109. d) The Genitives and Datives of all numbers, if the last syllable is long, can never have the acute upon this syllable, but only the circumflex : iroTafiov, Gen. Sing. 38 THE A DECLENSION. § 110. of 7roTafi6t;,rive7' ; TijuyjDsit. Sing, of n/xtj, honor ; ttoSwv, Gen. Plur. of TTovg,foot ; iiy\voiv. Gen. Dual of p/v^ month, § 110. Originally there was only a single declension, for which reason much has still remained common, which we shall put together below, § 173. But we distinguish Two Princvpal Declensions according to the ending of the Stems : 1. the Fi7'st Principal Declension {vowel declension), which comprehends the Stems ending in a and o ; and 2. the Second Principal Declension {consonant declen- sion), which compreh^^s the Stems ending in consonants, but also those in the soft ^wels i, v, in diphthongs, and a small number of Stems in o. First Principal Declension. ( Vowel-declension,) § 111. The first principal declension is subdivided into two, viz. : A. The A Declension, B. The O Declension. What is common to both is put together below, § 134. A. The A Declension {commonly called the First Declension). § 112. The A Declension comprehends those words whose Stems end in a. In certain cases, however, this a becomes r]. Hence the A Declension of the Greeks cor- responds both to the A, or first, and to the E, or fifth. De- clension of the Latin lang-uaffe. § 113. The A Declension contains only Masculines and Feminines. The two genders are most easily distinguishil in the Nom. Sing., in which the masculines take g, the feminines no case-ending. Hence the terminations of 115. THE A DECLENSION. 39 the Nom. Sing, are in the feminine a, rj, in the masculine § 114. 1. Feminines. Examples. X<^pa, Icind. y\a)(T(Ta, tongue. TifXT]^ honor. Stems. XOipa [terra] yX(opq. [terras] yXwacry Tifiy [re-i] Ace. X(opd-v [terra-m] yXaiaad-v Tifiri-v [re-m] Voc. XU)pd [terra] yXaxrad Tifir) Dual. N. A. V. X(opa yXwaffd Tina G.D. X(opaiv y\b}Uif%'' Dat. X<^paiQ yXaxraaiQ Tifidig Ace. X^pdg [terras] yXwaadg Tifiag Voc. XoJpai [terrse] yXwcraai Tifiat Examples for Declensicn. Bed, goddess. SS^a, ojnnion. yij, earth. (TKid, shadow. TTvXr], gate. yvojfir], opinion. (3ia,jorce. § 115. In certain cases in the Singular, but never in the Dual and Plural, a becomes rj. Hence the following rules : 1. In order to form the Nom. Sing, from the Stem, or from a given case-form of the Dual or Plural : §§ llC-117. Dialects. — 1. The Doric dialect nsi'cr changes a into tj: Tifid, Tifxag ; yXuJacra, yX^aadg. 3. The Ionic dialect changes every long a in the Singular into t] : (TO017;, TTSTprj, jSamXdrjg, fxoipy. Short a is generally unchanged, as ^aai- Xeid, fioXpdv : but in abstract substantives in -eid, -oid, a is likewise changed into rj : dXi]9eiT], truth, Att. dXi^Oua ; EVTrXoir], good passage; and also in Kvharj, steam from fat, SkvXX?/. The d remains in Oed and some j)roper names. 3. The Voc. of vvfuprj, young woman, is in Homer vvficpa. 40 THE A DECLENSION-. § 116. cb) a remains in the Nom. Sing, after £, i, or jo (§ 41) : St. ao(^ia, Nom. Sing, crotpia, wisdom ; Dat. Plur. iriTpaig, Nom. Sing, irirpa, rock. h) a remains in the Nom. Sing, after o-, and after the double consonants X,, S, ^, a a (or r r), XX, as well as in the feminine designations in -aiva\ St. a ju a ^ a, Nom. Sing. cLfia^a, carriage; Gen. Plur. Xtaivoiv, Nom. Sing. Xiaiva, lioness. c) After other vowels and consonants a is generally changed into ri in the Nom. Sing. : St. j3oa, Nom. Sing. j3o//, cry ; Ace. Plur. yvwfxag, Nom. Sing, yvw^ij (opinion). More important exceptions are: to a) kto/ot;, girl; Kopprj, temple; ^eipr], neck — to V) tparj, dew — to c) arod, hall; xp^^i color ; TuXfia, 'boldness ; Siaira, mode of life. § 116. 2. In order to form the other cases in the Singu- lar according to a given Nom. Sing. : a) If the Nom. Sing, ends in rj, this letter remains throughout the Sing. : ^iktj, justice, ciKr}g, ^iKy, ^iK-qv, ^ikt], h) If the Nom. Sing, ends in a, this letter remains always in the Ace. and Yoc. : a/uLa^a, a/uLa^av. c) If the Nom. Sing, ends in o, this letter remains also in the Gen. and Dat. when preceded by a vowel or /> (§ 41) : Nom. Sing. (T0<^m, wisdom, Gen. ao^iag ; Nom. Sing, aroa, colonnade, Dat. oro^t : also in some proper names with long a : Nom. Sing. Ar)Sa, Gen. Aii^ac ; and in jxva (contracted from fivaa), Gen. fivag, d) Otherwise a of Nom. Sing, becomes t) in Gen. and Dat. : Nom. Sing, fiovcra. Gen. juovcrrig ; Nom. Sing. ^laLTa, Dat. diaiTT}. § 117. For thequantity of a in the Nom. and Ace. Sing., the general rule is : apurum (after vowels) and a after p is long, every other a is short : Oed, goddess / afxiXkayfight. The exceptions are generally shown by the accent (§ 84, Obs. 2). The most important are the fern, designations in -rpia and -ua : \paXTpta, female player ; (SaaiXeia, queen (but j3am\Eid, dominion) ; and several words with diphthongs in the last syllable but one, as I^om. yhog, genus / St. and Nom. yvpaQf <^g^ / St. and Nom. mvairi, irhustard ; St. and Nom. aoTw, ciUj ; St. and Nom. r]Top, heart, % 140. The following words must be noticed separately : 77 yaGTr]p {j^t. y a a t e p), helly / 6 ttovq {St.7ro^),Jbot/ r] X^ip (St. x^tp)fhand / to ovq (St. (jjT),ear/ 6 irri^^yg (St. TT »7 X ^)' forearm ; ri ^piiv (St. /o § v), diajphragm^ mhid ; 6 TTtXeKvg (St. TTcXcfcu), axe / 6 j^orpvg (St. j5oTpv\ bunch of grapes ; 6 ), a^V/ ro irvp (St. IT vp), fire; to vdwp (St. v^aT), water. Of two genders (common) are several names of animals, as : 6 and t) dXeKTpviov (St. dXe/cr/owov), coch and Ae7i/ o and ri vq or trvg (St. if or 0- v), swjme [sMs] ; 6 and r) al'^ (St. a i y), goat; 6 and r) /3oi;c: (St. /3ow), iv, Ooj-mv, . Tpoj-iov, ^(t)T-(jjVj (p(jjd-(Dv, d(^d-(DV, Jy tt, 0, /3. Examples. Stems. 6 (pvXa^^ guard. Xe(3-i [pl6b-i] Xe(3-d [plSb-e-m] Dual. NA.V. G.B. (l>vXdK-e Xe(3-dg Examples for Declension. 'O fjLvpfir}^^ ant, St. fi v p fi rj k. j) according to § 157. r 6 irrixv-g, fore-arm, ) ri^vvaiii-g, power I both according to § 157. r) ardm-g, party, J action, ) Adjectives, § 185. C 2 58 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 155. § 155. The Nom. Sing. Masc. and Fem. is always formed by Sigma. The Neuter Sing, as well as the Vocative Sing, of all genders has the pure Stem. Yet sometimes the^Nom. form is used for the Vocative, and this is the case jn all monosyllables. In the Ace. Sing. Masc. and Fem. v is affixed to the Stem. • On the lengthening of monosyllabic Stems, § 142 h. But this lengthening takes* place also in the Nom. and Ace. Sing, of some polysyllabic words. § 156. Barytones in it, i^, tO, vd, v9 (Nom. i g, v g), form the Ace. Sing, generally by affixing v after rejecting the Stem-consonant : St. i pi^ (Nom. tpi-g, strife), Ace. epi-v ; St. Ko pvO (Nom. Kopv-Q, helmet), Ace. Kopv-v ; St. 6 pviO (Nom. opv'i-g, bird). Ace. opvl-v. Th^^Oxytones, on the contrary, always have a : l\7ri-g, hope, Ace. tXTrtSa ; kXeiq, hey, stands alone ; St. k X £ t 8, Ace. kKCiv (seldom jcXtt 3-a), Ace. Plur. icXtTc or icXftSac. Examples, . r) tpi-e, strife. r} t\7rt-f , Twpe. Stems. kpid. IXttiS. Singular. tpi-Q. tkiri-Q. tpid-og. l\7rid-0£. ?pid-i. tXirid-i. epi-v. lX7rid-a. § 157. Most Stems in i, as well as adjective and some substantive Stems In v, change their final vowel to t in Gen. and Dat. Sing., and in all the cases of the Dual and § 156. Dialects. — The Ace. Sing, in a of dental Stems is more fre- quent in Homer : yXavKdJirid-a (yXavKw-mg, hright-eyed), tpid-a ; kXeiq is KXrjtg, Acc. KXrj'id-a. § 157. Dialects. — The Ionic dialect leaves i unchanged : Gen. ttoXi-oc, Dat. TToXl (from xoXi-i), Nom. Plur. 7r6Xi-eg, Gen. ttoXi-wv, Dat. in Herod. 7r6\i-(ri(v), Homer 7roXi-e0(n{v), Acc. iroXi-ag (Herod, also iroXig). Other additional forms of the Homeric dialect are : Gen. Sing. TroXrj-og, Dat. Sing. 7r6\€-i and ttoXtj-V, Nom. Plur. TroXrt-eg, Acc. Plur. 7r6Xr)-ag. The Stems in v have always o c in the Gen. Sing. The Dat. Sing, only is contracted : ttjjx". £vpv-g, droad, has the additional form evpia in the Acc. Sing. § 158. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 59 Plur. Before the ending of the Gen. Sing, this c remains unchanged ; in the Sterns^, however, in /, and in some sub- stantive Stems in v, £ is followed by w ^ (instead of og), called the Attic termination, which does not prevent the accent from being on the antepenult : iroXe-wg, ir^XiKe-wg (iriXeKv-g, axe). In the Dat. Sing. £ i is contracted into £ i, in the Nom. Plur. £ £ c and Ace. sag into £ i g, and £ a of neuter substan- tives into T]. Adjectives maintain the uncontracted form £a : aarii]y but yXu/cta. § 158. The contraction of f £ to r? in the Nom. Ace. and Yoc. Dual is rare. The Gen. Plur. of Stems in l follows the accent of the Gen. Sing. : ttoXe-wv like ttoXs-wc- Most substantive Stems in v leave this vowel unchanged ; but others, like aarv, follow the analogy of Stems in i, and change v into f . u £ are sometimes contracted into v in the Nom. Ace. and Voc. Dual ; in the Ace. Plur. also we find tx^uc, with lyfiv-ag (lxOv-g,Jish), and o^pvgy Ace. Plur. of 6(j)pv-gf eyebrow. £y\£Xu-c, eel^ retains v in the Sing. : Gen. £yx^Xi»-oc ; but changes it in the Dual and Plur. into £ : Nom. Plur. l'^\kkug. The adjective 'Icpi-g, acquainted with, St. Id pi, keeps its I unchanged through all the cases. § 158. Dialects. — The Dat. IxQm is in Homer contracted into ixdWt In tlie Dat. Plur. a is sometimes doubled: vkKv-crai(y) with veicv-Ea(n(v) (yeKv-Qj corpse). 60 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 159. § 159. 2. Diphthong Stems, i. e., Stems in sv, aVf ov. Examples. 6 (3a(TL\evQ i) ypavg 6 and tj (3ovg Stems. /3a (according to § 132), Ace. I'w (from 'iwa). Obs. — Several Stems in o v follow the above declension in some of their forms : drjdojv, nightingale^ Gen. arj^ovQ, with di)UvoQ ; e/fcwv, image, Gen. ukovq (compare §171). dpicrrrj-Effmiv) (dpiffTev-g, prince) ; still there are Genitives also in € o e and BVQ ('0^u(7€we), Datives in tV, e t, and Accusatives in e a, 7/ : Tvdi). The New-Ionic dialect leaves e frequently uncontracted : jSamXk-eg. § 163. Dialects. — Homer extracts ijpco'i into 7/py, Mivioa into' MtVw. The old and poetic form fo^&-f is rjoj-g (St. ^ o), declined like aido)-g. Some proper names in a> in the Kom. Sing, have in the New-Ionic dialect an Ace. in ovv : ArjTovv, 'lovp. 165. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 63 III. Elided Stems, i. e.^ Stems which reject the final consonant in certain forms. §164. 1. S Stems, i. e., Stems which elide sigma. Examples. TO yevog, race. M. evyevfjg, N. evyeveg, of good family. Stems. ysveg ev y ev eg Singular. , Nom. yevog [genus] M. evyevrjg N. evyev'eg Om. (ysve-og) yevovg (evyeve-og) evyevovg Bat. {ysve-'f) yevEi (evyeve-'i) evyevel Ace. yevog (evyeve-a) evyevrj N. evyev'eg Voc. yevog evyev'eg N. evyev'eg Dual. iV. A V. (yeve-e) yevrj (evyev'e-e) evyevrj G.D. (ysve-oiv) yevoXv (evyeve-oiv) evyevolv Plural. J^.V. {yeve-a) y'evr) (evyeve-eg) evyevelg N". {evyev'ea) evyevf} Gen. (yeve-(jjv) yevaiv {evyeve-(i)v) euyevwv Bat. yevE-<«>7' (Nom. t^/awf, sweat ; yeXojg, laughter; xp'^Qi sMn), Dat. l^jO^, Ace. idpw, together with Gen. iSpoJTog ; yeXw ; and regularly in Homer xpo-of , xpo-t (poet. Xpff), Xpo-a- Compare alddjg, ri(^g, § 163. 66 ' CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 170. § 170. 3. N Stems, i. e., Stems which elide v. Examples. " M. F. fieiKav, greater. N. fxaiZov Stems. ' fJLEl^OV Singular. , N. V. fid^ojv N. fisi^ov Oen. IxeiZov-OQ Bat. fXElKoV-l Ace. fjid^ov-a [fiH^oa] jxeiKoi N. fiei^ov Dual. J^.A. V. HdZ,ov-f. O.D. fiaiZ,6v-oiv Plural. N. V. fxei^ov-eg [/let^oeg] fiei^ovg N. neiil^opa [jjiEi^oa] fxei^u) Oen. fiei^ov-iov Bat. fiEiZo-(n{v) Ace. fieil^ov-ag [fieil^oag] jxei^ovg N. fxEiZova [ixEeZoa] fieiKd) Examples for Declension. jSeXriiov, 'better. ato-x/wr, TYiore liateful. dXy/wi/, more 'painful. § 171. The full and the contracted forms are equally in use. But the open ones (/xctSoa) never occur. Compara- tives of more than two syllables throw back the accent in the Nom. Ace. and Yoc. Sing. Neuter upon the last syllable but two : l^iXriov, a'/txYfoy. Besides the comparatives (Nom. w v,- o v), there are only the two proper names, 'AttoXXwv (Stem, and Nom.) and Ilo- (TEi^ow (Stem and Nom.), Ace. 'AttoXXw (also 'A7roXXwv-a), Tlocrei^M (also Iloo-ff^wv-a). On the Vocative, see § 148, Obs. We may compare several Stems which fluctuate be- tween o V and o (§ 163). § 171. Dialects. — Somer forms the Ace. KVKeai or KviceiCj from kvkewv^ mixture. OP THK 172. . CONSONANT DEC^KgJON. ^^ ^ .^ .6^ § 172. Synopsis of terminations in the Second Principal Declension. Nom. Stem. Gen. in -a -ar TO (j(i)}ia^ l)ody. aionaros -ais -aid -air 6 Tralf, boy. rj dais, meal. Traidos daiTos -dv M. -av K -av -avT Udv, Pan. Adj. TO irdv, the whole. Uavog iravTos -ap -ap -apT -a(p)T TO tap, spring. t) ddjxap, wife. TO ^piap, fountain. tapos dafxaprog (ppeaTog -as F. -as K -ad -air) i) XafiTrds, lamp. TO Kpkas, meat. XafiTrddog Kpeios -ag M. -avT -av 6 yiyds, giant. Adj. [ieXds,Uack yiyavTOS [isXavos -avs F. -a{v) ri ypavs, old woTuan. ypdos -€t|0 -etp r) xe/jO, hand. X^^poQ F. -evT -ev -nd Part. XvOeis, loosed. Adj. els, one. r) KXdg, Tcey. XvQsvTog tvos KXeidos -er K -evT -sv Part. XvBkv, loosed. Adj. dppEv, male. XvQkvTos dppevog -6c K -wv, -5«(v), -a^. 6. TO ^opv, wood, spear : St. ^&paT (comp. 4.). Gen. ^opiiTog, poet, ^o p6 g, Dat. Sojoi and dopei. 7. Z £ V c (^^'^^^ ^, poet, and New-Ion. x^p-og, x^p-'h Ep. Dat. Plur. xet/o-etn or X€l/0-eiv,from Ilios. 3. Cons.-decl. : KOTv\T]dov-6-iXid ^iXi(o G.D. dyaBdlv dyaGdlv dyaOolv (j)iXioiv tpiXiaiv 0t\totv Plural. Nom. dyaOoi dyaQai dyaOd (^iXioi tpiXiai Neut. ?7(Tuxov, quiet. Comj)ound adjectives espe- cially are all of 07ily tioo endings : arf/cvoc, childless ; Kapirocjiopog, fruitful. § 183. Adjectives ending in £ o c and o o c in tl^ Kom. Masc. are generally contracted (§ 130) : yjivaioq, golden^ and oTrXooc, simple, are thus contracted : Singular. Masc. Fern. Neut. Masc. Fern. Neut. Nam. XpvaovQ Xpvar) Xpvaovv airXovg UTrXfj uTrXovv Gen. XpvcTov Xpv(Tng Xpv(Tov airkov airXrjg UTrXov Bat. XpV(T(p Xpvay XpV(T(^ ttTrX^ airXy a7rX(^ Ace. Xpvaovv Xpvariv Xpvaovv clttKovv cnrXfjv cLTrXovv Voc. XpvaovQ Xpvtrn Xpvaovv cnrKovg uTrXf} ciTrXovv Dual. jsr. A. V. XpvtTio Xpvaa Xpv(T(t) drrXu) aTrXd ctTrXo) G.D. Xpv(Toiv Xpvffdiv XpvaoTv airXoXv cLTtXaXv cnrXolv Plural. Nom. XPV some- cunde) ) where. 7V IsoM ^^, i whither, quo) ^ TToH, sometime. Try ■<. in what way i T^y\ some whither, in som^ way. ov OTTOV ) where \ {ubi). oQ^v \ whence oTToOev S (unde). ) whither ) (qiM). thitJier, in this way. ol OTTOl OTEj OTTOTE, wheU. tlv'iKa ) at what oTnjviKa S time. WQ, OTTiOQ, as. c whither:^ ( way. Obs. — tv9a and ivQiv, in their original demonstrative sense, occur only in a few combinations in Attic prose {ivBa dr),just then; ivOa Kul ev9a, here and there) ; but they are regularly used in a relative sense : where., whence. To the Correlative Adverbs there belong also cwc, qtiamdiu (Rela- tive, as long) ; rlwe, tamdiu (Demonstrative, so long), as well as the poetic b^pa (for o^pa, § 53, c, Obs.) used in the same meaning as «wf , and ro^pa as Hajg. To^the simple UeXvog (that, § 212) correspond among the Adverbs of place tm, there; eKEWev,from there; iKeiae, thither. The De- monstrative iig occurs in Attic prose only in kuI wg, even thus, and ovd' Mg, not even thus. It is also written Jtg in these combinations. § 218. The conjunctions Srj, Stjitote, and ovv (meaning ever, Latin cunqu£), and the enclitic Trep, may be joined to any relative pro- noun or adverb to give prominence: oang drj ttotb, whosoever ; oTTiog ovv (utcunqy^), eiffirep, just as. Sometimes ij is affixed to the interrog. tL in the sense of why f and to the corresponding indirect interrogative B n : rirj, otitj, why ? § 219. There are also negative pronouns and adverbs to be noticed : ovTig, fir]Tig, no one; ovSeTepogj^ff^Shepog, neither, neuter ; ovda/nov, firidanov, nowhere ; ovda/idg, fiijdafiwg, in no way. 220. THE NUMERALS. 95 Chap. IX. — The Numerals. § 220. The Cardinal^ Ordinal^ and Adverbial Numer- als, with their value and signs, are : 1 d elg, fiia, «V, one. 6 Trpwroc, thejirst. uTra^, once. 3 i3' dvo devTspog dig 3 7 TpHQ.rpia^ i Te(T(Tapeg, rka- ) rpiTog rpig 4 h' < aapa, or rkrvd- \ ( joef , TETTapa ) TETapTog TETpaKig * 5 e TTSVTe TTEfiTTTOg TTEvraKig 6 t' U EKTOg E%dKig 7 r (.Tcrd ffiSofiog ETTTaKig 8 V OKTU) oydoog OKTUKig 9 & tvvka Evarog {Evvarog) ivaKig (Ivvdicig) 10 i ■SsKa dsKarog ^EKUKig 11 id 'svdeica EvSEKarog EvdEKUKig 12 c(3' du)deKa diodEKUTog dbidEKUKig 13 ty' rpigKaidsKa TpigKaiSEKUTog 14 t^ \ TEcrrapiQKa'ihKa \ \ TsacapaKaideKa ) TEtraapaKai^EKaTog 15 IS TrevreKaideKa TTEVTEKaiUKarog 16 it' SKicaiSeKa EKKaidEKUTOg 17 tr tTrraicaideKa ETTTaKai^EKUTOg 18 IT}' OKTiOKaiSeKa oKTOJKaidEKarog 19 iff IvveaKaidEKa EVVEaKaidEKUTog 20 K EiKoaiiy) eiKOCTog EiKoaaKig 30 X' TpidKOvra TpidKOCFTog TpidKOVTUKig 40 /*; TE(xaapaKOVTa TEaaapaKoarog TEcrcrapdKOVTaKig 50 v TTEVTTJKOVTa TrevTTtKOffTog TTEVTTlKOVTdKig 60 r e^rjKOvra E^T]K0(TT6g UT]KOVTdKig 70 6^ ijSdofirjKovra tl3doiJ.T]KO(TT6g ilSdo/jirjKovrdKig 80 IT oydorjKOVTU dySoT]KO(TT6g oydorjKOVTaKig 90 q' IvEvriKovra EVEVtJKOdTog EVEVTIKOVTUKig 100 p Ikutov EKaroarog. EKaTOVTUKig 200 a didicomoi^ ai, a SiaKomocrrog ^laKoaiaKig 300 T TpidKoaioi, ai, a TpiaKoaioaTog 400 V TETpdKOCTlOl, ai, a TETpaKOmOCTTOg 500 ¥ TTEvrdicoaioi, ai, a TTEvraKoaiodTog 600 X i^aKomoi^ at, a E^aKOffLOtTTOg 700 f iTTTdKoaioi, at, a ETTTaKOCTLOaTOg 800 it) OKTUKoffioi^ ai, a oKTaKoaiooTog 900 ^ j ivuKomoi, ai, a EvaK0(TL0(TT6g or I ivvdKoaioi^ at, a EVvaKoaioffTog 1000 p. Xi'Xtoi, aij a XlXlOOTOC XiXid/cig 2000 J3 SiQxiXioi, ai, a Sigxi-Xioffrog 3000 n Tpigx'iXioi, aiy a vpigxiXiofTTog 10000 ji fjivpioi, ai^ a fivpioffrog fivpidicig 96 THE NUMERALS. 221. Obs. — The letters of the alphabet are used in numbers also in un- interrupted succession. In the most frequent designation, given above, stigma (^/3'=1863. § 221. The Cardinal Numbers 1 tcr4 are declined: 1. Norti. ' elg fiia tv 2. W. A. dvo Qm. tvoQ fitdg evoQ G. B. dvolv Bat. ivi inq, • tvi Ace. 'iva fiiav 'iv 3. Nrnii. Tpelg JV. Tpia 4. TEaaapeg If. Tsaaapa Oen. Tpiaiv Tecraapbjv Bat. rpi(T[{v) rkaaapmiv) Ace. Tpe7g iV! Tpia Ttaaapag iV". Teacrapa ov^dg, ov^e/iiiaf ov^ev-, and firtddgy no one, are declined like HQ. ^vo is also used without inflexion, ^vfiv is an- other form for ^voXv. tt occurs for o-o- in all forms and derivations of TscrcrapeQ. a^^w {amho, hotJi), Gen. Dat. a/x- 0otv, is sometimes represented by the Plur. afK^iOTLpoi, ai, a, of which the Singular ajuKfiOTepov, hoth, is also in use. §§ 330-223. Dialects. — 1, Homer has the fem. Id, irjg, ly : also Neut. Dat. T(^. 2, dvo) for all cases : ^orw, doioi, doiai, Sold ; Dat. doiolg ; Ace. doiovg, dg, d. 3, Tp'iTaTog-=.TpiTog. 4, Hom. ^ol. TTitTvpEg, New-Ion. rkacrepsg, Horn. TSTparog (§ 59, D.). 7, kl^^ofxaTog. 8, dydoarog. 9, tivarog. 13, Hom. SvwdeKa, and dvo Kal dUa, dvodsKaTog. 20, Hom. kiKoai, kiKOffTog. 30, Hom. TpirjKOvra. 80, by^wKovTa. 90, ivvTjKOVTa. 200, etc., also diijKomoi', Herod. TrevTijKotnoi, eivaK6 /uupidg; hence rpelg fivpiddeg = 30,000. § 224. The most important ge^iieral Adjectives of quan- tity are : cicaoToc, each / kKanpog, either,' irag, Tracra, irav (St. iravT), all / TTooToc, oirocTTog [quotjis] ; and the ad- verbs : iroWaKig, many times, often ; tKaaraKig, every time / oaaKig, as often as / ro<5avTaKiq, SO often / TrXet- GjaKiQi very often ; dXiyuKig, seldom, E 98 THE VEKB. § 225. B. INFLEXION OF VEEBS. General BemarJcs. § 225. The Greeks distinguish in the Verb — 1. Three Nmiibers : Singular^ Dual, and Plural. 2. Three Voices : Active : t\vaa, I loosed ; Middle : iXvcraiuYiv, I loosed for myself; Passive : IXvOr^v, I was loosed. Verbs which occur only in the Middle or Passive are called Deponents : ^ixofxai, I receive, Obs. — Only the Aorist and the Future have special lorms for the Passive ; and only the Aorist special forms for the Middle : in all other tenses the Middle forms have also a Passive meaning. 3. Two classes of Tenses : A. Principal, viz. : 1. Present : \vii),Iloose ; 2. Perfect : \i\vKa, I have loosed ; 3. Future : Xvctw, I shall loose. B. Historical, viz. : 1. Imperfect : cXuov, I was loosing ; 2. Pluperfect : eXeXvKEiv, I had loosed / 3. Aorist : tXvcra, I loosed. 4. Pour Moods, viz. : ' 1. Indicative : Xvoj, I loose / Finite J 2. Subjunctive : Xikjj, I may loose / Verb. I 3. Optative : Xvot/ii, I would loose / . 4. Imperative : Xue, loose. 5. Three Verbal Nouns, viz. : 1. Infinitive : Xvhv, loose ; 2. Participle : Xvojv, loosing; 3. Verbal Adjective : XvHoq, to be loosed, soU vendus. § 227. THE PERSONAL ENDINGS.— TENSE-STEMS. 99 226. The Personal Endings had originally the follow- ing* forms : * Active. Middle. Principal Teuses. Hist. Tenses. Principal Tenses. Hist. Tenses. Sing. 1. -/it -V -/xat -firiv 3. -at -C -aai -ao 3. -rt — -rat -TO Dual 1. -fiw -fiEOov 2. -TOP -(jQov 3. -TOV -TTIV -aQov -aOriv " Plur. 1. -fiw -fie9a 2. -re -a9s 3. -rn -V -vrai -VTO The Active personal endings of the principal tenses are most easily observed in the verb : €t-/it, I am. l b § g^§ ■^ "to ^ '3 <*) R" '!?■ 1*) vj) ^ Q:> ^ ^ ^^ .^ b b ^S s / ?. ?k =L a. :i. b b a. s s s s -s s ^ /< /< 1^ ,< /< 3- ?^ A 3 3 o < ^ >< s iJ^ 's rtii-i SSl-s JaJ b 3 « o « B s b b b b b ^ ^S ^S »S JS ^s ^ ^ >< ^ << >< ^•n o 11 '^'"refill ii^.flit 1 3- § ^ B 3 o CO «3 '3 « Si Wj y a s,; S "S ^S s s s ^ ^ /< ^ ,< /< coOhhmPh ^ J I -^ k s ^ J b^ '^ b'^ "* 'Si S ^^^'^ o o . b b oi ■s s \o ;^ ;> 104 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN Q. Table III. A. VOWEL STEMS. Active Tenses. 2 ^ If Indicative. Subjunctive. S S . Present. Imperfect. Present. S. 1 Xvo) iXvov Xviij 2 Xveig aXves m Xvyg 3 Xmi iXvelv) Xvy D. 2 XVETOV iXviTOV XvT]TOV 3 XVETOV iXviTijv XvTJTOV P. 1 Xvofuv iXvofiw XvbJjXEV 2 Xvere iXvere XVTJTE 3 Xvov(Ti{v) tXvov Xv(t)(n(v) Future. S. 1 2 3 D. 2 3 P. 1 2 3 Xv(T(0 XvaeiQ Xvaei XlXTETOV XvffSTOV Xvarere Xvixev Xv9T}re Xv9(o(n(v) 1 Future (Weak). S. 1 3 3 D. 1 3 -3 P. 1 3 3 XvOrjaofxai XvOrjay or Xv9r])v or Xv(Tdg * Middle and Passive Voices. Tinr]qf.(j9ai 7roir](Te(T9ai d07)X(O}9r)(T6fiEvog • 116 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN Q. Table V. B. CONSONANT STEMS. TrXeKio, I plait (Class 1) ; (pevyco, I flee (Class 2) ; Tenses. Indicative. Subjunctive. Active. Present. Present. ttXckw (pevyut rd(T(Tit) illJ ttXIkw ^evyoj rdaaio Future. • ttXs^u) 1 Aorist (Weak). 2 Aorist (Strong). 1 Aorist (Weak). fTrXe^a i(pvyov tTata TrXfi^w vyoj rd^oj 1 Perfect (Weak). 2 Perfect (Strong). . 1 Perfect (Weak). Perfect. TTSTrXExa TTscpevya rkraxa Pluperfect. iTTiTrXkxf^iv tTTi^ivyuv tTETdx^l-V 7r€7rX£\;a> TTE^EVyU) Tfraxw Middle and Passive. Present. Present. TrXkKOfiai rdaaofiai Imperfect. tTrXeKofitjv kTaevKT6£, toktoq. Examples for ayw, / drive (Aor. ijyayov, Perf, Act. ijxa) ; dpxio^Irule, both of Class (Pres. -ff(Tio, rarely -?w), see § 850. Nouns are formed from the Pure V dpx-n-i ^^ government. Table V. paradigms of verbs. — verbs in Q. f 17 I. GUTTURAL STEMS. rdaaix)^ I arrange (Class 4). Verbal Stems: ttXek, (pvy, ray. Optative. Imperative. Infinitive. Participle. Active. TrXsKoifit (pevyoifii rdffaoifii TrXsfcg pE9r]Ti KaXv(p9r]Ti irEfi9r}a6fiEvog XEi(l>9T}(r6fiEvog KaXv ti9htov didoXrov laTOlTOV 3 Ti-9ur}-Ti)v or 8i-doiT}-TT]v or i-aTairj-Trjv or ^ ^ Ti9eiTT]v didoiTriv i(TTaiTT}V P. 1 Ti-9eLT]-fiEv or ^L-doiTj-fiev or i-crTaiTj-fiev or riOeiixev Sidolfiev icTTalfjiev 2 ri-9eiT]-Te or dL-8oiT]-Te or i-aTair]-TE or Tl9HTe MoTre laTdiTE 3 Ti-9eiT}-(Tav or Si-SoiTj-tTav or i-(TTaij]-(Tav or Ti9eiev didolev laTOlEV S. 2 ri-9si di-dov 'l-.g] i-arri-g s 3 [i-er)] [i-dio] e-Q, deiK-vv in the 1 Sing. Pres. Act. On the distinction of the Present- Stem from the Verbal- Stem, see § 245, etc. The following Table exhibits the way in which the Per- sonal Endings are affixed to the Present- Stem by means of the connectins: vowels. § 232. Active. Middle and Passive. Present 1 Sing. \v-u) [solv-o] Xv-o-iiai Indicative. 2 " \v-El-Q [solv-i-s] Xv-y or Xvu 3 " Xv-ei [solv-i-t] Xv-e-TUL IDual Xv-6-fiE9ov 2 " Xv-e-Tov Xv-e-crOov 3 " Xv-e-rov Xv-e-a9ov • 1 Plur. Xv-o-fizv [solv-i-mus] Xv-6-ne9a 2 " Xv-e-TS [solv-i-tis] Xv-a-(T6e 3 " • Xv-ov-),I drive. " t/Xaw-o-v o " w : dveiSi^u), I reproach. " wveidi^-o-v. t "I: 'iKSTevo), I beseech. " 'iKerev-o-v 7. Homer, quite peculiarly, has in the 3 Dual Imperf. rov, , extended 6p6oj. a) This inserted vowel is usually sJwrt. Hence opdio is thus in- flected : Mid. Act. Pr. Ind. 6pd-(0 itt. bpoj I lorn . bp6 opd-yg op^Q a bpdifg, etc. Opt. opd-oifii bpvixi u bpotftfii Inf. opd-Eiv bpdv u bpdav Part. bpd-iov bpSiV u bpoiov bpd-ovaa bpSxra (( bpoiacra Gen. opd-ovTog bpwvTog (( bpoojvTog 2. Sing. Ind. bpd-y bpq. (( bpdg, 3. Plur. bpd-ovrai bpwvrai u bp6u)VTai Opt. 3. Plur. bpd-oiVTO bpt^VTO 11 bp6(^VT0 Inf. bpd-eaOai bpdoBai a bpdaffOai 3. Plur. Impf. eojpd-ovTO k(t)pS)VTO u bpodJVTO 136 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. § 243. are observed. Paradigms of the three verbs tl/liciw, iroiew, ^ov\6(x), are given on p. 110-113. Ods. — As the e i in the Infinitive f i j/ is not original, aeiv, oeiv do not become ^v, oiv, but dv, ow (§ 37, Ois.). Dialects. I) sometimes long, e. g., r'lfid-ovcra Att. rjjSuKTa Hom. -q ^u)0) a a from ri^du), I am youtliful ; so also from Spdijj,Ido; dpd-ovai Att. dpwai Hom. d p w cj (t i and from fivdonai, I remember ; fivd-eaOai Att. iivdaQai Hom. fivdaaOai. After long 'vowels, the one following is sometimes shortened : fiva-ofievoQ Att. fiviofxevoQ Hom. jxv o) 6 fiev o g r)(Bd-ovTeg " rjfiwvTeQ " r) fSMOVTsg The metre chiefly determines which of the vowels "should be long or short. Such forms, for instance, as dpsTdg, C ")? vjSoojvTeg (""""), are inadmissible. ^^ In Herod., the Stems in a often pass over into the conjugation oi the Stems in e : 6pk(o (but 6p^g, 6p^), dpeofiEv, bpkovai, opeovreg. Instead of £0 we also find €w : opsiovTeg. Homer also has ijvTeov = Att. ijvriov (from dvrd-(i), I meet) ; Xjoew/xevof = Att. xp'^h^vog, making use of. B. Stems in e fluctuate between the open and contracted forms, eo is often monosyllabic by synizesis (§ 39): Wpi^vEov, I complained ; often also in Ionic contracted to e y : Hom. vevfiai =z Att, vkofiai, I return home, eov rarely becomes e v : veiKevai = vuKovai, they quarrel. e € becomes rj irregularly in Hom. : ofiapTrjrrjv (ofiaprsoj, I rmet with), d-7rELXr]TT}v (aTTEiXeio, I threaten), dopTrrjrrjv (dopTreo),! Slip), Inf. ^oprjuevai =: Att. (popeiv, to carry. An utterly anomalous Infinitive is (popjjvai. The second e in the 3 Sing. Mid. is sometimes dropped : fivOsaL for fivOkai (Att. fiv9y, fivOei, tTwu sayest) ; ttwXso = Att. iTrwX'ov, thou hadst intercourse ; sometimes e e are contracted to e t : fivOelai. The first way is usual in Herod. Homer also prolongs e to e t without con- traction: veiKdtit =z Att. veiKw; ereXy'ero = Att. ereXelro (TeXw, I complete). C. Stems in o are mostly contracted: yowovfiai, I supplicate. Some have an extension like those in a : dp6io(n(v) =z Att. dpov(n(v), they plow; dT]i6(i)ev =: Att. dr]'ioTev,t7iey would destroy; vTrvojovrag =z Att. vir- vovvrag, the sleepers. In Herod, o sometimes changes to e, and with o is contracted to £v : tdiKai(ivv=: Att. ediKaiovv, deemed right. § 245. PRESENT AND VERBAL-STEMS. 137 § 244. Obs. — 1. Monosyllabic Stems in t admit only the contraction €1. All syllables which, contracted, would produce another sound, remain uncontracted. Stem TT \ € (Pres. ttXsw, / sail, Inf. irXuv) ' TrXkig 'jrXeiQ, but ttXsu) TrXeei rrXei, " rrXkovci tTrXEEQ iirXeig, " tirXeov deio, I Und, forms an exception, having to dovv (Seov), ^oviiat, etc., to distinguish them from forms of deu), I am in want of; M, it is necessary; to deop, duty. 2. Some Stems in a have a preference for rj, which they admit in the place of d : ^a-w, / live, ^yg, Z,y, KvTe, Zi]v ; Truvd-oj, I am hun- gry, TTHvriv', Sixpa-u), I thirst, di-^fjv; so also Kvd-u), I scratch ; afid-cj, I stroke ; ^j^d-oj, I scrape ; and xpa-o/xai, I Tuake use of . 3. piyo-h), I freeze, has w and ^ for ov and oi: Inf. piyujv, Opt. pt- 4. Xovio, I wash, lav-o, has a peculiar contraction ; that is, the con- necting vowel after o v disappears : i-Xov for e-Xov-e ; Xov-fiai for Xov-o-fiai, etc. In like manner, ol-o-fiai is often contracted to ol-jxai, I think, and the Imperf. (^-S-fiijv to (^-firjv. D. Distinction of the Present-Stem J^rom the Verbal- Stem. % 245. We call that jjart of a verb the Verbal Stem from the combination of which with the terminations of persons, tenses, moods, infinitives, and participles, consist- ently with the laws of euphony, all the forms of the verb may be explained : X v, Pres. Xuw, Perf. XeXu/ca, Fut. Xuo-w ; T t fxa, Pres. Tijicujjf Perf. rerijuriKa, Fut. tijuliictu). Obs. — From the Verbal-Stem also nouns are formed by means of the nominal suffixes : Xv-Evy-ixi , I flee, Pure Stem ^vy {^vy -i), flight, Lat fuga). XsiTT-a) , I leave, " a XtTT • TreiO-ot , I persuaxle, " u TT I e {mB- av6-g, persuasive). Tf]K-U), I melt, u TOLK rpt^-dj ,Irvb, " a rpi^ it, besides these, there are also six verbs in e w, viz. : TrXeu), I sail, Pure Stem ttXv Trvko),Il)low, TTVV veio, I sail, " " . VV peu), I flow, pv Osio, I run, 9v xki»,Ipour, x^ Obs. — The v of these Stems was lengthened to e v, but resolved to £p before vowels (compare § 35, D. 2) ; finally the f was dropped : TrXv-TrXevM-TrXePio-TrXeu). The diphthong appears in the substan- tives unresolved : 7rvev-fia, Ireath ; pev-fia, stream. Compare § 260, 2. § 249. 3. Third Class (T-class). The Present-Stem affixes r to the Verbal-Stem. *This comprises only verbs whose Pure Stems end in Labials, as : TviTT-oj, I strike. Pure Stem tvtt (rvTrog, stroke). (SXaTTT-u), I injure, " " /3 \ a /3 (pXafif), injury). (SaTTT-b), I dip, " " I3a

, / mZZ, Stem k \ a y y, K\ayy-rj, a call; 7r\dZ(o, I mislead ; craXTriKd), Illoio a trumpet, haye a Pure Stem in yy ; vi^u), I wash, has irregularly the Stem v i (5. § 252. c) X with l forms XX (§ 56): /3aXAfa>, I throw, for (SaXioj, Pure Stem (3a\ (j3e\-og, a shot). aXXofiai, I leap, " aXiofiai, " " aX [sal-i-o]. riXXii),Iplttch, " TiXiu), " " TiX Other Examples. 9dXX(o, I lloom. (§ 35, Obs.). N.B. — The other less usual classes of verbs are given below. § 253. Dialects. — Homer joins i immediately with Vowel Stems : da-i(D, I bum. Stem ^ a : na-io/jiai, I seeJc, Stem fi a ; va-icj, I dwell. Stem V a ; and he uses d^tXXw in the sense of tlR Att. d(j)eiX(o ; but, on the other hand, he has tiXw, / press, from the Stem I X for which one might expect tXXw (Class 4, c). 142 II. THE STRONG OR SECOND AORIST-STEM. § 254. 11. The Strong or Second Aorist-Stem. § 254. The Strong or Second Aorist Active and Middle is formed from the Strong Aorist-Stem, which is like the Pure Yerbal-Stem, except the few cases named in § 257. Pres. Stem XeiTT-a), I leave. X I TT rvTTT-o), I strike. /3d\X-t I3a\ I throw. Active. Aorist Ind. f-XiTT-o-v, / left. e-XiTT-e-g i-rvTT-o-v, I struck. t-TVTT-E-Q i-l3a\-o-v, I threw. i-(3aX-e-£ etc., like the Imperfects tXeiTrov, trvTrrov, ijSaXKov Subj. fXi7r-a> {XiTT-y-g TVTr-(j) TVTT-y-g /3aX-w (iaX-y-g etc., like the Pres. Subjunctive XetTrw, rwTrrw, (5d\\i Opt. |{ XlTT-Ol-fll XiTT-oi-g TVTT-Ol-fll TVTT-Ol-g (idX-oi-^i (idX-oi-g etc., like the Pres. Optative Xhttolhi, tvtttoihi, (idXXoifii Imper. [XtTT-e I Xnr-e-T(o TVTT-e TVir-k-T(o /3aX-€ (iaX-k-Tia etc., like the Pres. Imper. XeiTre, rvTrre, (idXXe. Infin. XlTT-UV (iaX-Hv Part. XlTT-bJV, XiTT-ovcra, XtTT-ov, Gen. XiTT- ovTog rvTT-iov, rvTr-ovcra, TVTT-OV, Gen. TVTT- ovrog (5aX-d)v, (3aX-ov(Ta, (3aX-6v, Gen. jSaX- ovTog Middle. Indie. |{ i-Xnr-6-iir]v i-Tvir^o-jxinv t(5aX-6-fir]v k-XlTT-OV k-TVTT-OV £-/3aX-oi; etc., like the Imperf. kXmronriv^ hvTrToixrjv, i(3aXX6fir]v Subj. IiXiTr-w-fxai Tvir-io-jiai jidX-oi-fiai (Xiir-y TVTT-y j3dX-y etc., like the Pres. Subj. X«Vw/iat, Tvirriofiai^ j3aXXw/iat Opt. ijXnr-oi-fH]v Tvir-oi-firiv (iaX-oi-ni]v (XlTT-Ol-O I TVTT-Ol-O (idX-Ol-0 etc., like the Pres. Opt. XMroifii^v, rvTrroifirjv, iSaXXoifirjv Imper. JXlTT-oi) TVTT-OV (5aX-ov I [Xnr-k-ffOu) TVTr-k-aQii) ^aX-'t-cQio etc., like the Bres. Imper. Xeittov, tvtttov, (5dXXov Infin. I XiTT-s-aBat Tvir-k-trOat I (iaX-'s-ffOai Part. j Xi7r-6-/u£vo-c, ?;, o-v \ TV7r-6-/ievo-g, rj, o-v | f3aX-6-iiisvo-g, rj, o-v § 257. II. THE STRONG OR SECOND AORIST-STEM. 143 § 255. 1. The Inflexion of the Strong Aorist-Stem dif- fers from that of the Present- Stem (Imperfect and Present tenses) ofily in the accent of the following forms : the In- fin. Act. is perispome Q^vkuv), the Infin. Mid. paroxytone {\i7ri(jdai)y the Part. Act. accents the 0-sound {Xnrtjv, \i- TTovaa), the 2 Sing. Imper. Mid. is perispome {Xiirov). 2. The Aorist Middle has not, like the Present Middle, the meaning also of the Passive : thus ipaXofirjv means only I threw for myself but not I was thrown. On the Augment of the Indicative, §§ 234-242. § 256. The Strong Aorist can be formed only from such verbs as have a Present- Stem different from the Pure Verbal- Stem, therefore not from the verbs of the First (unenlarged) Class (§ 247). Also it is not usually formed from many verbs of other classes, and scarcely occurs at all from any hvX Root-Yerhs (§ 245). Obs. — On the Aorists of the verbs ^w-w and ^y-w (class 1), see §§ 316, 16, 17. § 257. In a few verbs the Strong Aorist Stem is distinguished from the Pure Verbal Stem ; viz., instead of e of the latter, the Strong Aor. sometimes has a, by which rpgTr-w, / tum^ though belonging to the first class, has a Strong Aor. : t-rpaTr-o-v (Impf t-TpETr-o-v), e-Tpair-6-fir]v. An isolated formation is Pres. Tptljy-io, I gnaw, Aor. t-Tpay-o-v. ay-Wj I drive, likewise belonging to the first class, by doubling the Verbal-Stem forms the Aorist-Stem ay-ay, whence Ind. : iiy-ay-o-v, Subj. dy-dy-w, Inf. ay-ay-uv. § 255. Dialects. — 1. All the peculiarities enumerated § 233, D., ex- tend likewise to the Strong Aorist : 2 Sing. Subj. (SaXriaOa, 3 Sing. (3aXT]), Pure Stem (p pa^, Fut. (l>pa(rii). Accord- ingly^ verbs ending in the Present in -(raoj or -ttm gener- ally make the Fut. in -gw, and those having the Present in ^w generally have their Future in -o-w. According to this rule, let the Future be formed of iXiacFw, I roll / Krjpv(7^ 9'^'^^ ^^ oracle ; xpao/uaiy Itcse) exceptionally has t/ in the Future : \pi](Hi), '\pi](jop.ai ; whereas aKpodofxai, T listen, has aKpoaaojuai, Respecting the Future with a short vowel, see § 301. § 262. The contracted Future forms the Future- Stem § 261. Dialects. — The Ion. dialect has ri even after e,i,p: Trupijoofiai, I shall endeavor. The Ep. dialect sometimes doubles the a when the vowel is short : alSsaao/xai (aideoiJiai, I feel shame). The Hom. Futures aXaTrd^w, TroXe/ii'^w, r]va-TOV i.-(pr]va-a9ov h-Xv(jd-Tr]v i-Xv(Td-a9i]v l-rjva-ixEv i-(pT]vd-ixe-9a i-Xvaa-re e-Xv(Ta-(T9e i-va(Ta. Irregular Horn, forms without a *are : tx^va for tx^vtja, from Pres. x^w, / pour; tKrja, 1 Plur. Subj. Krjofisv or Kdofi^v, Imperat. Krjov or ksIov, Infin. Krjai or Kslai, from Pres. Kaio), I hum ; Stem Kav (Att. tKav(Ta)', tcaeva, Tres. atvu), I drive away; the Infinitives dXevaaOai or dXeaaOai, to avoid ; darkarrQai, from dareofiai, I distribute. § 270. IV. THE WEAK OR FIKST AORIST-STEM. 151 of the Future only by the addition of the a : Xue-pig~i), which generally takes the first place ; but in verbs com- pounded with prepositions is put, like the Augment, after the preposition (§ 238) : Xl-Xu-ica, but k-Xe-Xu-jca. The reduplication belongs to the Perfect- Stem, and is therefore, unlike the Augment, preserved in all the moods, infinitives, and participles (compare 258, D.). In verbs beginning with a consonant, it consists in the initial consonant with e being placed before the Stem : Stem Xu, Perfect-Stem XcXu, 1 Sing. Perf. Ind. Act. Xl-Xu-jca. § 273. Dialects. — The reduplication can not, like the Augment, be omitted in the Epic dialect; dky-jxaL forms an exception (3 Plur. SeX-^-T^'-)^ though we also find ^s-^ey-fiai, I expect or receive, Part. ^e-8sy-ixhog, from Pres. Sex-o-fiat, (compare § 316, 34). Some verbs' beginning with a vowel do not lengthen it in the Perfect in the New- Ionic dialect. 273. V. THE PERFECT-STEM. 153 ■ I. Active. Present Xv-ut Stem Xv Perfect Stem XeXw Perfect : 1. Weak form (paiv-io Pure Stem ^ a v TTC ?/ V 2. Strong fonn Indie. Xe-Xv-K-a, I have loosed. Xe-Xv-K-a-g Xe-Xv-K-e-(v) Xe-Xv-K-a-Tov Xe-Xv-K-a-TOV Xe-Xv-K-a-jxev Xe-Xv-K-a-TS Xs-Xv-K-d-(n{v) 7r£-0)]v-a, I Mve appeared. ■K'E-riv-E{v) TrE-di^r}-v, I ap- tpavut ^aveirj-v peared. d k-avy .^ dvrj-ixtv 13 avdr}-^w or ^aveifxev e-^dvT]-Te (pavij-TE (j)avdT]-Te or ^aveire k-av&-ai{v) (pavHTi-aav or dvri-T£ >5 5 trmg or Second Future Passive. Ind. (pavri-aofiai >| Opt. (pavrj-croifiijv -*etc., tlie same as the Future Middle. Inf. (pavTj-ffEaOai Part. ^avr]-o6fiivoQ^ ri,ov) § 293. The personal endings of the Aorist Passive are of an Active nature, those of the Future Passive of the nature of the Middle. They are appended, as in the Sec- § 293. Dialects.^The Hom. dialect lias the shorter ending ev in the 3 Plur. Ind. Aor. Pass. : e-cpdve-v or ^dve-v ; rpd(pE-v = lTpd. The Ion. dialect leaves the e in the SuIdj. uncontracted : /jXye-o} (jiicryu), I mix). Homer often lengthens the e in the Subj., sometimes to et : ddfid-b) = dafiio, Stem da ft, Pres. dd/jivTiixi, I tame; and some- § 295. VI. THE STRONG PASSIVE STEM. 165 ond Principal Conjugation (§ 302), to the Stem without a connecting vowel, and the e of the Stem is lengthened in the Indicative and Imperative to ??. In the Sjibjunctive, the £ is contracted with the vowels of the Subjunctive: (^avi'U), 0avw ; in the Optative, the e, combined with the modal sign ir], becomes ht] : 0av£-trj-v. The Infinitive al- ways has the circumflex on the penultima, and the Par- ticiple in the Nom. Sing. Masc. the acute on the last. § 294. The Strong Passive Stem, just like the Strong Aorist Active and Middle (§ 256), is formed very rarely from derivative Stems ; but it occurs in verbs of all class- es, even the first (§ 247), f being added to the pure Yerbal- Stem : Pres. paiTT-ii) (class 3, / sew), Pure Stem pa^. Strong Passive Stem pa(p£, Aor. Pass. lppa(l>r\-v ; (j(j)aTTco (class 4, / slaughter), Pure Stem (Tay, Strong Passive Stem (T((>ay s, Aor. Pass. i(T(j)ayr}-v, Put. Pass. (T^ayr}-(Toiuiai ; Pres. ypaiji-w (class 1), Strong Pass. Stem y patpe, Aor. Pass. lypa^i]'V. The Strong Passive Aor. occurs only in such verbs as have no Strong Active Aorist. The only exception is Tplirtj, I turn, Aor. Act. i-Tpair-o-v, Pass. l-TpCLTTTl-V. Obs. — By way of exception, ^XXayj/v is formed from the derivative Stem a X X a y, Pres. aXXdaao), I change. § 295. As in the Strong Aorist Active (§ 257), the c is sometimes changed into a : kXItt-t-w, T steal, e-K\a7rrj-v ; ariXkh), I send, l-(TTa\r]-v ; Tpit^i-tx), I nourish, l-rpdcprj-v ; irXiK-u), I twist, l-Tr\iKr]-v and l-TrXaKr^-v ; ttXtjo-ctw, I strike, times to ri : (pdvrj-y = , I hurt, Aor. Pass. £/3Xa/3»]v and £/3Xa00rjv. 168 verbal adjectives. § 300. Verbal Adjectives. § 300. The Verbal Adjectives are a kind of Passive Par- ticiples. Pres. Xvu), Stem X v, i. Xv-rog, 17, 6v, loosed, capable of being loosed. 2. Xv-rto-c, a, ov, to be loosened, solvendu-s, a, um. The First Verbal Adjective is formed by means of the syllable to (Nom. ro-c, rr], to-v) from the Verbal- Stem, and has the meaning either of a Participle Perfect Passive, Xv-T6-g=solu-tu-s, or of possibility, capable of being loos- ened. The Second Verbal Adjective is formed by means of the syllable rio (Nom. rto-g, Tta, rio-v), which is never con- tracted, from the Verbal- Stem, and has the meaning of necessity, like the Latin gerundive : Xv-rto-g, one who is to be loosened / XvAov tart, loosening' must take place, solvendwn est. The vowels preceding the r are in general treated ex- actly in the same manner as in the Weak Passive Aorist ; (T is inserted in the same cases as in the Aor. Pass. : tsXs- a-rog, KsXEv-fT-riov, The consonants before r are treated in accordance with the laws of sound : irpaK-ro-g (Stem tt pay, Pres. wpaaaio) ; jpaTT-T6-g{ypa(l)(jj) ; Ko^ut cT-r£0-v( Stem KOfxtd, KojxiZtjjyl carry). Verbs which leave their Stem Vowel short in the forma- tion of their Tenses. % 301. The Vowel remains short throughout in : § 300. Dialects. — Zoa-rb-Q is derived by metathesis (§ 59) from the Stem ^ € p (^£|oa>, I flay). § 301. Dialects. — The H(fm. dialect lpd(i),Ilove, Aor. Mid. '^pdffdfirjv ; djOKEw, / ward off, ^pKE7i^ in the Weak Aor. Act., and short in the Perf., the Aor. Pass., and the Verbal Adjective in Sk(jJ, I Und, Fut. drjffio, Aor. Act. edriv-iuih ^ ^^Vy Plur. i^ta-jxiv, £-0t?-v, Dflal t-(pa-TOv ; [f-^ij-v, / jplaced'], Plur. t-Oe-jULEv ; ^HKvv-fii, I show, Plur. ^ukvv-h^v. Obs. — Those forms which always have the vowel long are specially noticed below. § 304. All verbs in fxi are divided into 2 classes : 1. Those which in the Present join their terminations directly to the Stem : ^rj-jui ; 2. Those which form the Present- Stem by adding vv to the Pure Stem : ^uK-vv-fii, I show, Pure Stem 3 1 1 ic, Pres- ent-Stem daiKvv. 172 IRST CLASS OF VERBS IN fit. 305. I. FiRgT Class of Verbs in jui. §§ 305 and 306. The Paradigms of this Class of Verbs are inserted on p. 124, fol. sqq. § 307. Some few forms of the Verbs in jui are formed §§ 305, 306. Dialects. — The following are Ionic secondary forms, those inclosed in brackets being the New-Ionic. Active. 2 Sing. Pres. Ind. Ti-eri-aea di-doX-aOa, also Si-dol-g 3 " " " Ti-eu Si-Soi 3 Plur. " " Ti-eel(n(y) Si-domi(v) also {7rpo)9tovm(y) 2 Sing. Pres. Imperat. di-Sio-Oi Inf. Pres. TL-drj-fiBvai Si-dS-fiep di-dov-vai Imperf. 1 Sing. [i-Ti-Oe-a] [l-di-6ov-v] 3 « [l-Ti-Oe-e] Middle. 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. [ri-0€-arai 5i-d6-arai 3 " Imperf. " Pres. Part. n-dri-nwoQ Active. 2 Aor. Ind. 3 Plur. u a " Subj. 1 Sing, ee'no [06a>] 2 " enyq OX OrjyQ dt^c 3 " Oeiy Sa)(n(v) or 6u)y(Ti{v) " " 2 D. " " 1 Plur. ekiofiEv or dojojxEv Qdofiw " " 3 " Inf. [i-fiai, laTdlvTo). Other peculiarities of verbs of this class are : § 310. The three Stems Ot {rW^iit), go (g/gw^t)^ and I (V»]/it) form an irregular Weak Aorist in ica : Wr]Ka, f SwKa, riKa, but in the Middle we find only i]Kafir]v. In the Sing, of the Indicative the Active forms are customary instead of those of the Strong Aorist, but in the Dual and Plural of the Indicative they are rare. The other moods and the Participles have the strong forms exclusively. The really customary forms of the Aorist, therefore, are these: Ind. Subj. Qut Mid. Wkunv iOriKa Opt. eeirjv Subj. Owfiai iQtiKag Imp. Bkq etc. tOriKf.{v). Inf. BCivai Wetov Part, edq iOsTTJV tOsfiev (seldom WljKanw) Were ( " WfjKaTe) tOecrav ( " WriKav). § 311. 2. The roicgh breathing instead of the o- of the Stem o- r a is also used in the Perf. (§ 60, h) : i-drrj-Ka for (T£-(TTrj-Ka. On the shorter forms, forajufv, etc., see § 317, 4. icTTij^tx), I shall sta7id, is a Third Future Active. The Per- fects of Q £ and I are rWetKa, tiKa ; the same vowel also re- mains in the Perf. Mid. Tidu^iai, Eifiai. The Stems g o and ara leave their vowel short in the Perf. Mid. and Aor. § 310. Dialects. — ^From the Stem d o Hom. has sometimes Fut. di- Sia-(T(o instead of ddjau). § 312. FIRST CLASS OP VERBS IN fxi. 175 Pass., and £ in the Aor. Pass. : ^i-^o-fiai, e^69r}v, IcTraOriv, IriOrjv, TeOriaojuLai. On the meaning of the different forms ofW»?/if, see §329,1. § 312. To the First Class of the Verbs in fit there also belong : A) Verbs whose Stem ends in a (compare *i(TTr)iii) : 1. ri-jui (compare Lat. d-io), I say, only in the Imperf. rjv, 3 Sing, r) (compare § 213, Ohs.). 2. 6'vi-vr}-fjiL (Stem ova,^ SOS), I benefit, Mid. ovivafxat (§ S09), I have advantage, Strong Aor. Mid. tjvrtfxrjv, wvrjao, wvr}TO ; Opt. 6vaifjLr}v, Imperat. ovyicto, Inf. ovaaOaiy Fut. ovYjCTii), bviidOfiai ; Aor. Pass. tJvriOrjv, 3. TrL-fX'-Tr\r]-fxi (Stem TrXa, § 308). Additional form, irX^di), I Jill [Lat.^Z^-o], Fut. 7r\i](Tw, Perf. Mid. iriirXri- (Tfiai, Aor. Pass. ettXtj^^t^v. 4. TTi-fi-irpri-fiL (Stem irpa). Additional form, irpriOtjj (quite like 3). 5. (pri-juL (Stem <{) a), I say, 2 Sing. Imperf. ecjyrjaOa (enclitic in Pres. Ind. except 2 Sing., compare § 92, 3). Imperat. (paOi or (jidOi ; compare (paaKU), 324, 8. 6. xp^ (Stem X P «' XP^)' ^^^^ ^lust, Subj. xPVf ^P*' Xpeivy Inf. xpvvai, Part. XP^^^ (only Neut. from xp^ov according to § 3^7, D.). Imperf. IxP^^ ^^ XP^^> l^ut. xpn- o-f t ; air 6 xpVf it suffices, also 3 Plur. airoxp^i^ f^t{v), etc., as above awoxpcid)* 7. Ki-xp^'l^^ (Stem xp^9% 308), I lend. Inf. Kixpo,vai, Fut. xpv^ or elrj, Inf. luEvai, Ifiw. Imperf riia and 77/ov, 3 Sing. ijk{v) or t6(i;), 1 Plur. yo/xej/, 3 Plur. »yVov, ii'iaav, with (rj;^, '/i£^', ttrav. Fut. tlaofiai, Aor. Eiffdfiijv and hiaafiriv. 2. Stem icet, 3 Plur. Keiarai, KtaTui, keovtm, Imperf. Kdaro, ksuto [jckrai = mrai]. Part. Fut. kswv, cuMturus, Inf KEikfiEv. 6 V is an Hom. Stem in 0, Pres. ovofiai, I vituperate, ovoffai, 3 Sing. Opt. ovoiTo (§ 309), Fut. ovoffaofiai, Aor. tjvocrd^rjv, and, from the Stem 6 V, wvdfirjv. p V or £ p V is an Hom. Stem in v, 3 Plur. elpvarai, tliey rescue, protect, Inf. pvaOai, ipvaOai, elpi)fi€vog, Imperf. 2 Sing, tpvtro, 3 Plur. pvaro, kpvaro, elpvvTo ; moreover. Inf. Act. elpvuevai, to draw ; Aor. Mid. pmuTo, he rescued; kpvaoaTo, Tie drew. § 315. FIRST CLASS OP VERBS IN juu. 179 Obs. — When compounded witn prepositions, KEifiat is almost iden- tical in meaning with the Perf. Pass, of the corresponding com- pounds of riOijfii : vTroriOrjiJit, I lay as a foundation ; viroKeiTai, it is laid as a foundation. § 315. D) Verbs whose Stem 'ends in a consonant (a) : 1. elfii (Stem I e, Lat. es-se),Iam. Pres. Ind. d-fii (for Icrfii) ia-fisv el (for iff-ai) la-Tov id-rk (es-tis) t)v i(TT(t)(Tav Part, wp ovffa ov (Stem ovt) (Lat. esto) eorwj/, ovtujv Imperf. riv or /} r;/iev i]rr9a 7jepTe = (pepEve, bring [Lat./er^e], 180 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN /xt. §316. t(T-irjv, as the Inf. Elvai for id-vai ; uiv for kojv (Horn.), from ea-wv. In the Imperf the Dual has most fully preserved the (t. Obs. 2. — Eifxi is enclitic in the Pres. Ind. except the 3 Sing, el (com- pare § 92, 3) ; iaTi is paroxytone when it denotes existence, or means the same, as t^etrrt, " it is possible,''^ as well as at the begin- ning of a sentence and after the particles ov, fit], ei, wc, Kai : tcm Oeog, there is a God; ovk taTi, it is not possible. When merely ex- ternal causes prevent it from being enclitic (§ 93, c), l. Sterns in c. 9. €-ffj3r?-v (Stem (rj3f), Pres. a^ivvviii, I quench, § 319, 7, Inf. (rj3»}vat. 10. E-cTJcXn-v (Stem (tkXc), Pres. ctkeXXw, / dry, Inf. (7»cXfiva«. 11. Imperat. crx^-g, from o"X£-0t (Stem gx^), Pres. t'x^, § 327, 6, 1 Sing. Ind. t-ax-o-v. Stems in (i), 12. i-a\(i)-v (Stem a\(i)),I was caught, Pres. akiaKo^at (§ 324, 17), Opt. aXoirjv, Inf. aXC}vai, Part. aXovg. 13. £-j3t(u-v (Stem j3 f w), Pres. j3tow, / ^^^^, Opt. jSfoJr^y, Inf. (5iu)vai, Part, jdiovg. Dialects. — 2. Part, yj^pac 3. [Her. tdprjv.] 4. 3 Sing. tKTci, 3 Plur. tKrav, Subj. nrkiafiw, Inf. /cra/wevat, Mid. tfcraro ^e icas M^, § 225, D., 2), Pass. Aor., 3 Plur. tKrdOep. 5. Mid. tTTTCLTO, Subj. TTTrJTai, DoP. 1 Siug. Act. £7rrar. 6. 3 Plur. trXdv. 7. Subj. 3 Sing. tpOrfy or ^0»7(rt(v), {Trapa)^9air](n{v)^ 1 Plur. (p9s(o/iEv, 12. j^Xwv, Subj. dXww, Opt. 3 Sing. dXoi)/, Inf. dXiofxevai. 182 FIKST CLASS OF VERBS IN jUf. § 316. 14. e-yv(i)-v (Stem y v lo), Pres. yi-yvM-aKw, I come to hnow (§ 324, 14), Opt. yvoiriv, Imperat. yvCjOt, Inf. yvwvai, Part. yvovQ. ^ Stems in i, 15. Imperat. ttI-Ql (Stem tt t), Pres. Trivw^Idrink, 1 Sing. Aor. Ind. 'imov (§ 321, 4). Stems in v, 16. i-^v'v (Stem 8v), Pres. ^vw,! dive, Imperat. ^vOi, Inf. Svvae, Part. Sac. As to its meaning, see § 329, 4. 17. e-, Inf. yvwfxevai, 15. Imperat. vie. 16. 3 Plur. idv-v, Subj. ^ow, ^u^e, 3 Sing. Opt. Un (from ^w-tq), Inf. 17. 3 Plur. ^vp. Besides these, the following are peculiar to the Ep. Dialect : 18. Part, dirovpag, Pres. d-Kavpcua^I take away. 19. Stem /3 \ j;, Pres. /3a\Xa>, I throw ^ 3 Dual ^vfi(3\riTT}v (met together)^ Fut. ^vfi(3Xri(T0fiai, Mid. t/SXj^ro (w)as ?dt, § 255, D. 2), Subj. (iXij-e-Tai, 2 Sing. Opt. (3XeTo, Inf (iXrjaOai, Part. l3Xf]fievog (hit). 20. Stem o i' r a, Pres. ovrdio, I wound, 3 Sing, ovra, Inf. ovrdfievai, Part. Mid. ovrd/xevog (wounded), Yerh. Adj. ouraro?. 21. Stem TT r a, Pres. Trrfjcraio, I stoop, 2 Dual i-irTrj-Tijv, Part. Perf. 22. Stem tt X a, Pres. TreXa^w, / approach, Aor. Mid. TrXrjTo. 23. Stem /3|[> w, Pres. (3i-^pib-(TKb}, I eat (§ 324, 13), Aor. e/3pwv. 24. Stem ttX w, Pres. ttXwu), I sail, 2 Sing. Aor. eirXbjg, Part. 7rXb)-g. 25. Stem icrt, Pres. fcW^w, I found, Part. Aor. Mid. tv-Kri-fievog (well- founded). 26. Stem ^ 1, Pres. , I please); iKfievog, favorable (Stem t K, iKveofiai, I come). § 317. Dialects. — 1. Hom. 3 Plur. pe(3aa(Ti(v), Part. (5e(3awg, Dual (3e- /3a aire. 2. Hom. 3 Plur. yey ad7, Perf. dvioya,! command, 1 Plur. dvojyfiev, Imperat. dvoJxOi, 3 Sing. dvoJxOio, 3 Plur. dv(ox9e, Plup. ?)va>yea. 12. Stem eyep, Perf. iyp-riyop-a, I am awaJce, 2 Plur. Imperat. fcypi^- yop9e, 3 Plur. Ind. kypr}y6pQd (§ 263) Fut. Mid. dfupi-eaofiai i^fi(piE(Tfiai Aor. i)fi(pi-£j9eyi (with o 7 y w) ot^w l<^X« and t<^ya (§ 279) it^x'^nv ey^a (§ 237) ti^yiiai 20. oXXvfii (Stem 6X and 6X6),for 6Xwfii,Ii 6\w (§ 262) oXtiXem (§ 275, 1) wXeca Fut. Mid. oXovfiai oXioXa .. , , in trans., //)ms^. 0)X0flT]V ) -^ 21. ofxvvfii (Stem 6fi, 6}x6)^I swear. ofiovfxai (Act.) ofiwuoKa (§ 275, 1) wfioaQrjv wfxoaa g-gjjjg pgj.f jyjij I ofubfioTai Verb. Adj. (dv)w/toroe ( 6lXb)fiO(TTai 22. ofiopywui (Stem bfiopy)^! wipe out. w/xopKa (Mid.) wfiopx&vv 23. w^yvvfii (Stem tt a y), /^;i; [compare Lat. pango] .iirrj^a TrsTrijya {I am fixed) \ t7rrix9r]v i tTrdytjv 24. (6//yvv/ii (Stem pay), J ^mr. f |0j6;;?a (Mid.) eppojya (I am tom) kppdyrjv (§ 278) payrjaofiai 25. (TTopvvfxi (Stem trrop), with . 21. wfiotTcra or bfioaaa. To these also belong : 27. aivvfiai, aTToaivvfiaij I talce away, used only in the Pres. 320. IRREGULAR VERBS. 189 Obs. — Nouns are formed from the Pure Verbal-Stems, as : ij SeX^t-c, the announcement; 6 Kpd-rrjp, tTie mixing howl; rb El-fxa^ the clothing — for Pea-fxa ; r) ^w-vt/, tlie girdle; rj pw-/f»/, the strength ; to arpu>-fia, the carpet; to Z,vy-6-v,the yoke; 6 6Xe-9po-Q,the ruin; 6 avv-iofio- Tr}-Q,the conspirator; 6 Trdy-o-g, the frosty h^ar-frostr Chap. Xlt. — Irregular Verbs of the First Principal Conjugation. § 320. The irregularities of the Greek Verb chiefly con- sist in the Present- Stem differing from the Verbal- Stem in a way different from that which has been pointed out above, § 245, etc. To the four classes there enumerated the fol- lowing four classes are to be added. Obs. — In these as well as in the following lists, the principal forms only are given, fi-om which the rest are easily formed. (Mid.), added to a tense, denotes that, in addition to the Active, the Dialects. — 28. dwni (and dvv(x)), I complete, only Imperf Mid. i)vvto. 29. apvvfiai, I acquire, Aor. i^pSfiriv, Inf. dpeaOai, 1 Aor. 2 Sing, iipao, 3 Sing. TjpaTo. 30. dxvv^ai, I grieve, Aor. dKdxovTo (§ 257, D.), Perf. dKdxrjfJiai (§ 275, 1), 3 Plur. dKTjx^daTai (§ 287, D.), 3 Plur. Plup. dKuxduTo, Part. dKaxn- fievog and dKrjxsfieuog. Moreover, the Active a/caxiZw (/ grieve), Aor. ■^Kaxov and dKdxr](Ta (compare § 326). 31. ydvvfiai, J rejoice, Fut. yavvaa^Tai. 32. daivvm, I entertain. Opt. Pres. Mid. 3 Sing. daivvTo (§ 318, D.), 3 Plur. daivvuT, Fut. dai(T(o (Mid.), Aor. iSaiaa (Mid.). 33. Kaivvfjiai (Stem Kad), I Surpass, Perf. KSKatrfiai (I am distin- 34. Kivvfiai, I move, additional form of ictvlw, Preterite i-Ki-o-v,Iwent, Subj. Ki-cj, Opt. Ki-oi-fii, Part, ki-wv. 35. Tivvfii, Tivvfxai, additional form of nVw, § 321, D. 5. 36. opeyvvfii, additional form of dpsycj, I stretch out, 3 Plur. Perf. Mid. opwpex"^"* (§ 287). 37. opvvfxi (Stem 6 p), I excite, Fut. opaio, Aor. wpopov (§ 257, D.), Perf. opojpa (§ 275, 1), I have arisen [Lat. or-ior], Aor. Mid. 3 Sing. JjpTo, arose (§ 316, 38), Perf. Mid. 3 Sing. Ind. 6pa»p-e-Tai, Subj. bpwpriTai, with Imperf Mid. opkovTo. 38. Tdvvfiai, with Tavvw, reivu), I extend, stretch. 190 FIFTH, OR NASAL CLASS. § 321. corresponding Middle form is also in use ; e. g.^ in addition to iTiaa (No. 5) iri(Tdfii]v also is used. Fifth^ or Nasal Class. % 321. The Verbal-Stem is strengthened by the addition of V, or of a syllable containing v, to form the Present- Stem. a) V alone, often united with lengthening of the vowel, is added to the following Stems : 1. Stem /3 a, Pres. /SatVo), I go. Aor.Act. Fut. Perf. Pass. i-fin-v (§ 316, 1) ^iiGoiiai (5e^r}Ka (§ 317, 1) t/3j7-(Ta (3i](To) (§ 329, 2) Verb. Adj. (idrdg 2. Stem £ \ a, Pres. iXavvw,! drive. fiXd-aa. iXuj (§ 263) ajjXa/ca (§ 275, 1) v^dOriv i\r)\anai Verb. Adj. eXareog 3. Stem ). 7. Aor. Mid. idvaeTo, § 268, D. [Pres. tvdweoj, I put on. Compare § 323]. § 322. FIFTH, OR NASAL OliASj 191 9. Stem Kdfi, Pres. Kctfivu),! weary. i-Kan-o-v Kafiovfiai KSKfiijKa 10. Stem Tefi, Pres. rkfivu),! cut. t-Tefi-o-v (trdfiov) TSfid ThfirjKa (§ 283) hfirjOrjv § 322. h) The syllable av is added to the following Stems : 11. Stem aiaO, Pres. aip, wp-6-firjv 22. Stem 6^\, (iXaffT-rj-au) tjSXdarrijKa (§ 274 exc.) Pres. dapOdvtj,! sleep. dapO-'fi-aofiaL deddpOrjKa Pres. (dTr)e xOdvofiai,Iam hated. (d7r)€x0-^- a, Pres. ^aivoj ((i>adv(ti), I shine, shmo, Aor. Pass. ^adv9r}v. § 322. Dialects. — 12. Aor. ?)//j3porov for r)fipdrov (§ 257, D. Com- pare § 51, D.). 13. diP)sK(o. 15. Aor. iSpd9ov (§ 257, D.). 18. Ep. KXxdvb). 21. [Herod, datppdnrjv, 1 Aor.] 192 . FIFTH, OR NASAL CLASS. § 322. 23. Sternal, Vve%. av^ dvio^I please. 24. Stem r y, Pres. 9iyyavb)^I touch. e-9Xy-o-v Oi^ofiai 25. Stem \ a /3, Pres. Xafifidvoj, I take. t-\d^-o-v Xfjipofiai tiXij^a (§ 274) i\r]9r]V dXrjuiiai (seldom XeXijuiiai) 26. Stem Xd9, Pres. Xav9dva),I am hidden, with X^0w (Class 3), Mid., I forget. t-Xd9-o-v Xrjau) XkXT)9a Mid. eXa96fiT]v Xrjffofiai XsXrifffiai 27. Stem \ a x, Pres. Xayxavoj,! attain. t-Xdx-o-v XriKofJiat £tX»7X" (§ 274) tlXijyuai 28. Stem fid 9, Pres. fiav9dv-(rK-ofxai,I revive. (dv)e-(3i. 15. 3 Pirn-. Fut. Gopeovrai [with edp-vv-fiai, according to § 319]. 16. With rpw-w. 24. Aor. tTTtjvpov, Inf. tTravpeiv. 196 SIXTH CLASS, OR INCHOATIVE VERBS. § 324. 25. Stem evp, Pres. ev p-i-cr k-u), IJind. evp-ov (Mid?) evp-r]-(T(i) fvp-ij-K-a evp-e-9r}v (.vp-r]-Hai Evp-e-OTj-ffOfiai 26. Stem (rrep^ Pres. crrsp-i-ff k-m, I deprive (with artpib, Mid. ^ (TTEpofiai, I am deprived) k-arkp-rj-aa (XTep-rj-cru) i-arkp-ri-Ka e-(TTep-r}-9r]v i-, / cooh i]}pr]-(Ta ixptj-tjo/xai tj^prj-fiai r)\l/r)-6T]V Verb. Adj. t(i>06g 20. Stem 9e\(e) or l9eX{e), Pres. 9s\-io or ies\-o), I will rjOtXij-ffa {t)9E\ri-(ru) ,rt9k\r}-Ka 21. Stem iS(e), Pure Stem tiJ, Pres. 'li^ofiai, I seat myself; also iKdvoj, Class 5. Compare eKofiai. iKa9i(Tdfir]v (§ 240) Ka9iZ,i]. 45. Stem ^ i ^, Pres. (pEidoixai, I spare, Aor. Mid. Tre(pidka9aL (§ 257, D.), Fut. Trecpidrj-aofiai. § 327. EIGHTH, OR MIXED CLASS. 201 6 fiaxv-Trf-c, t^ warrior ; y fiEWrj-fri-g, the delay; fiov-ifio-g, remain- ing; 6 vofi-o-g, the law; y od-ixTj, the smell; 7) x^P'^j the jay . § 327. EigJitJi^ or Mixed Class. Several essentially different Stems unite to form one verb ; 1. Present aipk-ix),! tdk£, ; Mid., I choose ; Stems a\p?. and k X. €CK-ov (§ 336) aipr)-a(i) yprj-Ka ype-9r]V Inf. (Xuv d\6fir]v aiprj-(TOfiai yprj-fiai 2. Pres. t px-o /xai, I go, come ; Stems kpx and t\(v)9 fiX[v]9-ov IXev-aofxai tX-rjXvO-a (§ 275) Imperat. lX9s (§ 333, 12) Inf. tX9eiv. The place of the Fiit. is generally supplied by eJiu. 3. Pres. tp d-oj and peZ-io,I do; Stems tpd, epy, pey i-pe^a tp^ii) • ipkx9r]v Obs. — The original Verbal-Stem is /^ e |0 y, hence to Fkpy-o-v (§ 34, D.), Att. tpy-o-v, worJc ; from (P)tpy,hj the addition of the en- largement of the Present i (Class 4), arose {P)tpy-t-(o, and from this tpS-(o. But by metathesis P epy became P pey, and, with loss of the P, pey, whence the regular Present, according to Class 4, is piZ-o), i. ay-ov Fut. td-ofiai kd-rjdoKU (§ 275) TjSa-j. (r7rio-fj.at Inf. aTrk(T9ai Obs. — The original Stem is o-e tt, from which k tt has arisen by weak- ening 0- to the rough breathing (§ 60, V). In the Aor. Ind. the rough breathing is not organic, e being properly only the Aug- ment. Besides this there is a syncope (§ 61, c). § 327. Dialects. — 1. [^apaipyKa, dpaiprjfiai, § 275.] 2. Aor. fiXv9ov, Perf eiXriXov9a (§317, D. 13), Part. tXr]Xov9wc. 3. [Pres. spS-oj] Perf iopya (§ 275, D. 2), Plup. iuipyeiv, Aor. tp^a and tpe^a. 4. Pres. t(T9ix) and tcio, Inf. 't^-p.evai, Perf tS-rjS-a, Mid. IS/jSoTai. 5. Pres. Act. tVw, I am occupied, Aor. t-air-ov, Inf. (nrelv, Part, (nrwv^ Fut. fi/'w, Subj. Aor. Mid. tWw/^ai, kaTroifiyv, kaTrk(T9ai, kaTTofievoQ. I 2 202 EIGHTH, OR MIXED CLASS. § 327. C. Pres. tx-i^^I'have^ liold (Imperf. fixov, § 236) ; Stems tx a^^l (Tx(e) t-ax-ov, I seked. 1. i'^w (Mid.) Subj. from which « x lias arisen by weak- ening a to the rough breathing (§ 60, 1). From (rex by syncope came t-ax-o-v, by metathesis ax^, from which axs-e, t-axv-Ka. From i X came the Future Ua and the Verbal Adj. t/c-rd-e, while in the Present-Stem the rough breathing was changed into the soft breathing, because of the aspirate in the following syllabic (§ 53, 5, Ohs.) : tx-oj for ix"^* Compare also v-n-icrxveofiai and dfi- iriaxveofiai, § 323, 36. All the Stem forms also appear in the formation of nouns : to axT}- ^a^ the form ; i) t^i-g ^ the leaving ; ix- vp6-Q,Jirm^ tenable. 7. Pres. fiiay-w, I mix, misc-eo ; Stems fiKry and ft i y, additional form fiiyvvfii (§ 319, 18). 8. Pres. opd-a),I see; Stems 6pa, iS, ott Eid-ov (Mid.) vxpofiai t-wpd-KU w, Stem av, dP^ I sleep {I as Reduplication, compare § 308), Aor. ataa. § S29. IRREGULARITIES OF MEANING. 205 and also make most of their tenses in the Middle form. Those are called Passive Deponents whose Aorist has a Passive form : e. g., (dovXoiuai, I wish, ij3ov\r)9r)v, I wished. The most important Passive Deponents are the following, of which those marked * have a Passive Future, which is used alons: with the Middle : EvXaphiiai, I am on my guard. *i]SoiJiaL, I rejoice. J- Ovuiouai TTjOO ^ItaTce to heart. I am inclined. Htti ) ( / am anxious. jxera J CLTTO ^ K vosouai tv Trpo , ' / repent. ' I despair. I reflect. I ponder. . I anticipate. dyafiai, I admire (§ 312, 8). ^aidkofiai, I dread (§ 301, 1). aXdofiai, I ramble. afiiXKdofiai, I rival. *dpvso/iai, I deny. *dx9ofiai, lam indignant (§ 326, 12). (SovXofiai, I wish (§ 326, 14). Seofiai, I need (§ 326,15). depKOfiai, I look. *dca\eyo[xai, I converse. Uvafiai^ I can (§ 312, 9). olonai, I am of opinion (§ 326, 30). ivavTioofiai, I am Opposed. asfiofjiai, I reverence. iTTiffTafiai, I know (§ 312, 10). (jtiXoriixkofiai, I am ambitious. O&s.— Several of these verbs have the Middle Aorist as well as the Passive. 3. The Passive Aorists of several Active verbs have a Middle meaning : thtppaivw, I rejoice, ev(j)pav9riv, I re- joiced ; arpicjxjj, I caiise to turn, larpai^nv, I turned — myself; (^taivw,! show, t(l>avriv, I appeared, etc. 4. The Passive forms of several Deponents have also a Passive meaning: laojiai, I heal, laOr^v, I was healed; Ziyjipai,! receive,V^iy(%r\v,I VMS received; in some even the Middle forms have both Active and Passive meaning : fiLfiioiiai, I imitate, ninifir]ixaL, I have imitated or have heen imitated. § 329. B) Transitive and Intransitive Meaning. When the meaning of a verb fluctuates between Trans- § 329. Dialects. — The Strong Aor. tTpa(pov {Tp'tcpu)^ I nourish) in Horn, has an intransitive meaning, I grew up. In Herod. , dvkyvojv {dvayi- yvuxTKU)) means I read, dvkyvwaa, I persuaded ; Hom. ypLTrov, I fell, Aor. to kpe'nru) (Class 2), / throw down; tvaaaa, I caused to dwell, Aor. to vaio), I dwell. 206 IRREGULAEITIES OF MEANING. § 3^9. sitive and 'Intransitive, the Strong Aorist has the intran- sitive, and the Weak Aorist and Future Active the tran- sitive meaning ; when there are two Perfects, the Strong likewise has the intransitive and the Weah the transitive meaning ; if there is only one Perfect, it is intransitive. The most important cases of this kind are : 1. Stem (xra, Pres. to-rr^^t, /^Z^J^c^, Weak Aor. iaTr\k(rTr]Ka, I Tiave revolted; ivKa,I am hy nature, to which the Pres. is (jtvoiiat. 4. Stem S V, Pres. Suw, I sinlc, hide, often transitive ; icaraSuw, I cause to sink, also t^vaa, Zvau) ; but c^Dv, I sunk myself , I dived ; Ividvv, I put on; l^iZvv, I pict off- 5. Stem (Tj3€(c), Pres. (T(5tvvviuii, I que7ich. Weak Aor. £-x", and be- tween -Ki-wpaya and TrLirpaya, see § 279. § 331. General View of the Accentuation OF Verbal Forms. The general rule given in § 229, that in the verb the accent is removed as far hack as possible from the end, is subject to the following exceptions : For all contracted syllables the accentuation is seen from § 87. Hence Sokw, eXw^ev (§ 263), TrEaovjuLai (ttitttii}, § 327, 15), TiOw^ai (§ 302), XvOw, Xv% (§ 296). Compare, however, § 307, Ohs. § 330. Dialects. — 9. Horn. daiu),lsetjire to, Perf. Udr]a, I have caught fire. 10. Horn. tXTTw, / ghe hope, Perf. iokira, I hope. 11. Horn. (pOeipio, I destroy, Perf. {ci)tf 1 hegin), or de- rived {Denominativa), i. e.^ formed from^ a N'ominal-Stem (§ 100) : apxa-lo-q, incipient, ancient, from the Nominal- Stem dpxa, Nom. apxi], beginning. % 340. Nouns are usually formed — whether from a Ver- bal or from a Nominal- Stem — by means of a termination. This termination, added to the Stem, is called a derivative- ending or suffix. Thus X070-C is formed by means of the suffix o from the Verbal-Stem Xty, apxa-lo-g by means of the suffix Lo from the Nominal- Stem apxa. The suf- fixes serve more clearly to define the idea of the noun, or to mark the different relations in which the general idea of the Stem is to be conceived : Verbal-Stem ttoie {ttoilj, I p7'oduce, compose), TToi-n-Tit-g, compos-^/*/ 7roirj-(n-g,com- ■posi-tion ; 7rot?j-jua(r), composition, poem; Verbal-Stem y pa^ {ypd by means of the vowel i : Masc. KeKpo7r-t-dr]-g, Fem. KeKp07r-t-g, Nom.-Stem KEKpOTT, Nom. Ke- KpOXJ/. Stems in ev and o of the Second Principal Declensiopi also adopt the connecting vowel i, before which the v of ev is dropped : UriXe-i-d r]-g, from the Nom.-Stem UrjXev, Nom. Uri\ev-g. Homeric ad- ditional form UriXrjiddii-g (compare § 161, D.). Ar}To-i-S r)-g, from the Nom.-Stem Atjto, Nom. ArjTw, son of Leto. The Stems of the 0-Declension substitute l for o : Masc. TavraX-i-d rj-g, Fem. TavTaX-i-g, Nom.-Stem TavTaXo, Nom. Tdv- TaXo-g. " Kpov-i-dT]-g, *' K p o v o, Nom. Kpo vo-c. Only those in lo (Nom. lo-g) change these letters to m : Masc. eecTTid-drj-g, Fem. Oeand-g, Nom.-Stem QEffTio, Nom. Qeano-g. " MevoiTid-d r]-g, " Mevo itio, Nom. Mevoi- Tio-g. 01)8. — A more rare sufSx for Patronymics is lov or Xwv, Nom. kov : Kpovicov, son of Kp6vo-g. The Poets take many liberties with re- gard to the metre. § 349. I) Gentile names, or substantives describing per- sons as natives of certain towns or countries, have the suf- fixes : 1. €u, Nom. Evg (compare § 341), oxytone. Msyap-ey-g, Nom.-Stem Meya/oo, Nom. rd May apa. 'EpETpi-ev-g, " 'Epsrpio, " 'Eperpia. 2. Ta, Nom. TT]-g, paroxytone. Tiyed-TT]-g (Teyea), Aiyivr]-Ti]-g {Aiyivrj)^ 'RTreipuj-rri-g {'HTTEipo-g), SiK£' Xi(ij-Trj-g (20'g, a father'^ s hrother ; it remains, however, where the word originally began with digamma (§ 34, D.) ; Hom. drfjULioepyo-g, Att. ^rjluLovpyogj artisan. Obs. — Exceptions to these rules are frequent. Thus Stems in or often appear in an abbreviated form in compounds : ^Kpo-KvovoQ^ Mlling with tJie sword (Stem ^ i ^ e e) ; Tuxo-naxia, « contest at the wall (Stem Teix^Q)i the final vowel of A-Stems is sometimes preserved as a or ?; : dpeTd-Xoyog, a speaker about mrtUe; xorj-ipopog, hearer of funeral offerings. A case-form seldom occurs instead of the Stem-form : vewg-oiKog, shedfm' shijjs; dpEaai-^drrjg, wandering on the hills. § 355. The ending of a word is often somewhat altered in composition, especially when the compound word is an adjective : rt/i//, (piXo-Tijuo-gy amhitious y irpayfia, ttoXv- TTpdjfjibJv, 'inuch occujpied. The ending y\ g Masculine and § 358. FOEM OF COMPOSITION. 221 Feminine, e g Neuter, deserves special notice ; this ending occurs : a) in many adjectives formed directly from Verbal- Stems : a-j5\aj5-r]g, uninjured (/3Xa/3, Pres. /BXaTrrw) ; av- rapK-rjg, self-sufficient (avro-g and a/OKtw). b) in adjectives, whose second part comes from a sub- stantive in £ c (Nom. og) : ^cica-trijc, ten year's old (trog) ; KaKo-{]Or]g, of a had nature {^Oog). Obs. — Observe also the compound adverbs in e i or t, oxytone : avTo-x^ip-i, with one's own hand; d-fxiaO-i, without pay ; 7rav-di]ix-ei, with the whole people. § 356. A verb — without changing its nature — can only be compounded with a preposition. The looseness of the connection in such compounds is the reason for the posi- tion of the Augment mentioned in § 238 : a7roj3aXXw, / throw away; airijdaXov, I threw away. For the same reason, prepositions are frequently separated from their verbs in the poets and in Herodotus, and in some cases even in Attic prose (compare § 446). This separation is called tmesis. When any other word is to be compounded with a Ver- bal-Stem, a noun is first formed of the two, e. g., from \iOo-g and Stem /3 a X, \i6o-f36Xo-g, throwing stones, and thence Xt 0o/3oXf-w, I throw stones ; so likewise from vav-g hnd fia^^o/iiai comes first vav-ixayo-gi fighting at sea, and thence vavixayjihi ; from cu and Stem £ /o y, evipyirrig, hene- f actor, ^vepy^ii),! do good. § 357. A substantive of an abstract meaning can only be compounded with a preposition without changing its termination: irpo and /3ouX/) make Trpoj^ovXri, previous consultation. In every other compound the abstract sub- stantive must take a derivative ending : XiOog and ^oXit make Xt0oj3oXm, throiving stones / vavg and fiaxn, vai>- fJLaxia, seafijght / tu and Trpa^ig, evirpa^ia, well-heing. § 358. Compounds having the first part formed directly 222 MEANING OF COMPOUNDS. § 359. from a Verbal- Stem are rarely met with except in the poets. They are formed in two ways, viz. : 1. the Verbal or the Present- Stem is joined directly to Stems beginning with a vowel, and to those beginning with a consonant by means of the connecting-vowels e, i, or o : ^aK-i-Ovfio-g (Pres. ^clkv-oj, Class 5), heart-gnawing/ TTud-apxo-Qf obedient to order {TreWojuaL and apxn) ; apx-i- TtKTtJv, master-huilder ; fjucr-o-yvvo-g, hater of women (jui- (ri(x)). 2. A form strengthened by o-, and resembling the Weak Aorist-Stem, is joined in the same way to the second part of the word: Xva-i-rrovo-g, freeing from trouble; 7rXrj|- nnro-g {wXridau), Class 4, a), tohipping horses; (Trpeipi-hKO-g (orpf^w, Class l),perverter of right. § 359. II. Meaning of Comjpounds, In regard to their meaning, compound Adjectives and Substantives are divided into three principal classes : 1. Determinative compounds. In them the second word is the principal, which, without in any way altering its meaning, is merely defined by the first. These compounds may be paraphrased by changing the first part either into an Adjective or an Adverb : ajCjOo-TroXf-c, high town, castle^ i. e., aKpa TToXig (Hom. iroXig aKpri) ; juea-riiuj^pia, midday, i. e., fjLiar] ri/uipa ; ipBv^o-Kripv^, i. e., ^ev^rig Ki]pv^y false her- ald ; 6 fio-^ovXo-g, fellow-slave, i. e., 6 fjiov ^ovX^vmv; fieya- XoirpeTrrig, grand, properly, ajpjpearing as great ; o^i-yovog, late born, L e., 6\ps jevofKvog. This class is the least nu- merous. 2. Attributive compounds. In them the second word is indeed also defined by the first, yet so that the latter alters its meaning, and, together with the first, forms a new idea, which is attributed as a quality to another word. These compounds can generally be paraphrased by employing the Participle of ix^> ^^ ^ verb akin to it in meaning, and adding to this the second word as an object, the first be- § 359. MEANING OF COMPOUNDS. 223 coming an attribute to the object : jjiaKpo-x^ip, longi-manus, long-handed^ i. e., juaKpag x^^P^^ ^'x**^^ (^^^ ^^^ long hand itself); apyvp6'To^o-g,j>?'ovided with a silver how, i. e., apyvpovv to^ov (^ipuyv ; o/uLo-Tpoiro-g, of the same Jcincl, i. e.^ ofxoiov TpoTTov f x^i^ 5 yXavK-ioTTi-g , hri(/ht-ei/ed, i. e.^ ykav KovQ ocpdaXjuovg exovcra ; TriKpo-yajuo-g, having a hitter wedding y Kov<^6~vov-g, frivolous^ trifling / o-Gj-<^|Owy, of sound se?ise, sober ; ^EKa-sTiig, ten years old, i. ii)v ; a^io-Xoyo-g, worth sj)eaMng, i. e., \6yov a^iog ; (l)iX6-iuiov(To-gy loving the Muses, i. e., (j)iX{ov rag Movaag; ^£i(Ti-^aifjiwv, fearing the gods, i. e., ^^^iwg Tovg ^ai/uLovag ; x^fjOOTronjroc, made hy hand, i. e., Xipai iroir]T6g ; 0wl3\a(^{]g, injicred hy God, i. e., viro Oeov jdtjdXapfxtvog ; oiKoytviw, horn in the house, i. e., Iv o'/k(^> yevofxevog. Obs. 1. — Prepositions may he joined with substantives in any of the three principal classes — (1) Determinative : dixiKi(i)v, viz., vEojg, i. e., Kiovag afiye, contracted aiK-rjg, reproachful (Stem e t k, toiKo) ; d-epy6-g, contracted dpyo-g, inactive (tpyo-v, work). The prefix ^vg corresponds to the English 7nis, and, as the opposite to eu, denotes something unfortunate, awk- ward, difficult : ^vgapearog (§ 324:, 10), displeased ; ^vg- /SouXoc, ill advised, i. e., KUKag (5ov\ag t'xwv (attributive) ; cvgaXwTog, hard to capture (§ 324, 17). Here, too, de- terminative compounds from substantives are rare : Hom. Avgirapig, unfortunate Paris, PAET SECOND. S Y N T AX. Preliminary Hemarhs. § 361. 1. Syntax {avvTa^iq^ arrangement) teaches the use of the forms discussed in the first part of the grammar, and the way in which words are arranged into sentences, and sentences are combined together. 2. A sentence is either simple or compound. Every sentence is simple in which the necessary parts of a sen- tence occur only once. 3. The necessary parts of a sentence are : a) the Suhject, i. e., the person or thing about which something is stated ; h) the Predicate^ i, c, that which is stated. Obs. 1. — Every form of the finite verb (§ 225, 4) contains a com- plete sentence in itself, in which the personal ending contains the Subject and the Verbal-Stem the Predicate : 0?y/«t, / say ; t, in medio, in the midst ; iv ri^ irapovr i, at the j>rese?it moment, for the present; Ik iroWovyfor a long time ; S c t v a, terrible things. Hence a Neuter Adjective often stands as Predicate to one or more Masculine or Feminine substantives to ex- press a class or genus in general : Hom. ovk. ay aObv iroXvKoipavirif the government of many is not a good thrnig; opOov aXi^OeL aeiy truth is always the right thing ; Beivov ol iroXXoi, KaKovpyovg orav t^wm TrpoaTarag, a bad thing is the many when they have base leaders; rapaxat ica\ araoHQ oXiO pia Ta7g TToXfcrtv, disturbance and disCord are ruinous to states. 230 THE ARTICLE. § 367. § 367. The demonstrative pronoun, instead of being in the Neuter as in German, frequently agrees in gender and number with the Predicate to which it refers, just as in Latin: ovtoi hctiv av^pig, those are men j ovroq opog coTt ^iKaioarvvrjg aXr]Ori re Xiyeiv Koi a av \dj3ri rig airo^ido- vai, this is the idea of justice, to speak the truth, and to give hack what we have received \_haiG notio justitice est']. The relative pronoun also often agrees in Gender and Number, not with tlie preceding substantive to which it refers, but with the substantive following, which is added as a Predicate: (ItiXov, 6 luiyicrrov ayaOov lariVf ov (ppov TiZovaiVy they do not care for a friend, which is the great- est good. Chap. XY. — The Article. § 368. The Article 6, 17, to is originally a demonstrative jpronoun, and still employed as such in Homer, both in a substantive and adjective sense, and frequently also in the language of the other poets : Hom. rv\v eyw ov Xvau), her / will not give ujp ; poet, tov, ^ Zev irarsp, ^^t'orov, uiM, father Zeus, destroy , Hom. (^tdlau as to aov juivog, this thy courage will he thy ruin. § 369. The Article in this demonstrative sense is also employed in the following cases in Attic prose : 1. In connection with ixiv and ^£ : 6 /xl v, the one ; 6 ^i, the other. O&s.*— Used adverbially, to {to) \ikv — to {to) de, mean partly — partly. 2. Sometimes also with Kai and ^i : jcat tov KeXevcTai, and that he ordered ; tov koi tov, the one and the other. 3. In TTjOo r ov, hefore that, formerly. § 370. The real Article generally corresponds to the English definite article. It serves to set forth an object. § 374. THE ARTICLE. 231 either as a single one (the individualizing article) or as a class (the generic article). Obs. — 6, »7, TO in Homer almost always has a demonstrative power. Yet in many cases — compare especially § 379 — the use of these forms approaches very near to that of the Attic Article. The Article, however, in Homer is scarcely ever necessary, and is fre- quently omitted also in the Tragic writers. § 371. 1. The Individualizing Article sets forth a sin- gle object above others of the same kind, and that : a) as known or having been pointed out before : Herod. XaXjcf 8f £c T CLQ Itt ^AprejuLKTito eiKom vrjaQ Trapei^ovTO, the Chalcideans furnished the (before mentioned) twenty shij^s at Artemision ; IS^ip^rig ayeipag Trjv dvapiOiuLr)TOv (rrpariav ijXOev ewl ttiv 'EXXd^a, after having collected the (well- known) innumerable army, Xerxes marched against Greece. Obs. — In this sense proper names also, which in general do not need it, may take the Article : o ^oKpdTtjg, Socrates, whom you know, or who was mentioned before. § 372. h) A thing as distinguished from others by the addition o^ distinguishing circumstances : 6 rwv 'AOrjvaiwv ^rjl^og, the Athenian j)eople (no othei:) ; 17 woXig rjv noXiop- KovfjL^v, the city lohich we are besieging (just this). § 373. The distinguishing circumstance expressed by the Article is often indicated in English by the, possessive pronoun : cjcaoroc tCjv ^r]iiLOvpyC)v tt) v ri)(yriv KaXtog £$- EipydZeroj each of the artisans practised his art well. § 374. In connexion with numerals, the Article some- times denotes that the number to which it is added stands in a defined relation to another number : rd ^vo julprj, two thirds / Twv Tpiy]pii)v rpiaKoaiujv ovaCjv twv iracrwv rag ^laKomag ii iroXig rrapicTX^To, of the triremes, of which there were three hmidred in all, the city furnished two hun- dred. The Article has a similar effect with quantitative adjectives of a more general kind : iroXXoi, inany — ot ttoX- 232 THE ARTICLE. § 375. Xoi, most; irXtovBgy more — ol nXeoveg, the greater part ; aX\oi,alu — ol aXXoi, cceteri / oX[^oi,afew — ol bXLyoi,the oligarchs. § 375. 2. The Generic Article indicates a whole class of homogeneous objects : ol iroXlrai, all the citizens ; 6 pwwp, the orator (by profession) ; ^a tov (TTparitJTr}v top ap\ovTa fiaXXov rj Tovg iroXEfxiovg (j)oj5ei(TdaL, the soldier must fear his superior rather than the enemy. Obs. — Hence the Article may also be used with proper names in the plural when a whole class is to be described : o I ArjfioaOeveig, . orators like Demosthenes (a Demosthenes, compare § 363, Obs. 1). § 376. The Article is not used when a substantive only expresses an idea in general : aydpilyirov xpvxrj tov Ohov pETtx^i, man's soul partakes of the divine / so 0f oc de- notes the deity ; 6 0£oc, a particular god ; so likewise, in many other current expressions, the more ancient method of not using the Article has been preserved : wktoq, hy night; r}iuifpag,hy day; IttX OaXcKrari, at sea; irpog ckjtv, to town; Kar'aypoVfin the country; Kara yfjc, under the earth ; Iv ^t^ia, on the right ; l^aiptj X6yov,I exempt. % 377. The Article is omitted with a number of sub- stantives, which by custom have almost acquired the force of proper names : fiaaiXevg, the king (of the Persians) ; TrpvTavEig, the presidents (as officials); hv clkpottoXei, i7i the Acropolis (Athens). § 378. The Predicate (§ 361, 3, lo) generally has no Article : YJjpog tyivETo f^atriXev g rtjv Hepcrwv, Cyrus hecame Jdng of the Persians; irovog evKXdag Trarrip, labor is father of fame ; ol "AOrjvaloi IlspiKXia eIXovto (TT parriy 6v, the Athenians chose Pei'icles general (com- pare §§ 387, 392, 403, and 438, Ols. § 379. By means of the Article, any adjective, partici- ple, or adverb, as well as the infinitive, may be made a substantive : Hom. 6 ylptjjv, the old man ; ol nXoixnoi, the rich; 6 Xiywv, the speaker ; 6 TrtXac, the neighbor; ol § 385. THE ARTICLE. 233 TrapovTsg, those present ; to. koltcj^ the tender (part) ; ot 7ra- Xai, the ancients / to julktuv, hating or hatred. Obs. — With the Neuter Article, any word, or even a whole sentence, may be represented as one object : to dvrjp, the word dvrjp or the idea " man ;" to TvutQi aeavTov, the saying or rule " Know thy- self." § 380. The Generic Article (§ 375) generalizes the idea of a participle, which then is to be translated by a relative phrase : tzoihtu) tovto 6 j3ovXo/x£voc, do that, who will; jmij t^rireiTS rov ravra Xi^ovra, seeh not (one) who will say this (compare § 500). § 381. By the Article, many adverbs, placed between it and a sub- stantive, become attributive adjectives: oi tote dv9pu)7roi, the people of that time ; i] TrapavTiKu ridovr), the momentary pleasure ; ai evOdde yvvdiKEc, the women of this place ; rj dyav iXevOepia, the excessive free- dom. § 382. In the same way, a genitive, or a preposition with a substan- tive, placed between the Article and another substantive, becomes an attributive clause : tu tHjv 'AOrjvaiojv TrpdyfiaTa, the affairs of the Athenians ; oi iv Ty iroXu avOpioiroi, the people in the city ; ?) Ka9' rjfikpav Tpotpf], the daily nourishment; al dvev XvttCjv r/dovai, the painless pleas- ures. § 383. The Article often stands alone, sometimes with the Genitive of a substantive (compare §§ 409, 410), some- times with a preposition followed by a substantive ; in such a construction the Article has the force of a substan- tive (§ 379) : ra rwv 'AOr^vaiwv, the affairs (possessions, interests) of the Athenians ; o\ Iv ry TToXei, ^/i^ (people) in the city; ra /^tra ravra, what JvUows, the later (events). § 384. When a substantive with an attributive (§ 361, ll) adjective has the Article, the adjective staiids between the substantive and the article : 6 ayaOog avrjp, the good man. § 385. If the substantive alone is to be prominent, and the adjective to be added as apposition (§ 361, 12), the substantive stands first, and the adjective with the article follows, thus : 234 THE ARTICLE. § 386. a) The siobstantive without Article, when tlie case is such that the substantive, if put alone, would have no arti- cle : TL ^la^ipH avdpwTTog aKpaTrjg Or^piov tov aKpars- arciTov; in what does an ungovernable man differ from the most ungovernable beast f for if Or^piov stood alone it would be without Article, dr]piov,from a beast. b) The substantive has the Article when by itself, even without an adjective, it must have the Article : ol Xloi to Tuxog ir^pieiXov to kuivov, the Chians pulled down (their) wall— the new one (which they themselves had built) ; for, even without the adjective, it would have to be to TCi\oq TrepidXov (§ 373). § 386. The same rule holds good with regard to the po- sition of the attributive additions mentioned in §§ 381 and 382 : 6 'A9r}vai(i)v S^/xoc, the Athenian jpeojple ; 6 S^/ioc, 6 rwv 'A^Tjvatwv, the people, that is, the Athenian ; 6 jueTo. TavTa xpovog, the after time / 6 yjpovog 6 jueTo. TavTa, the time v^hich followed this. § 387. An adjective which, without the Article, either precedes or follows a substantive having the Article, is pre- dicative, i. e.^ the character is assigned to the substantive only by this word (§ 361, 4, 8, and lo) : ayaOog 6 avr)p or 6 :^vrjp dyaOog (viz., l(TTiv)ithe 7nan is good; aTravTsg txojuiev TO (TWjua OvriToVf we all have a body (which is) mortal. The translation may often be effected by a relative clause : ol ^A6r]vaLOi riyovvTO avTOVOfxiov to irpCnov GViip.a\wv, the Athenians had the lead of allies (who) at first (were) inde- pendent / (jjaivoiuai fULeyaXag Tag v7ro(Txi(TEig iroiovfjLivog, I seem to onake promises which are great. Compare § 378. Obs. — Witli proper names, the use of the Article is very uncertain when the class is added to which they belong : b EixppdrrjQ -n-ora- fiog or 6 TTOTafibg 6 'Ev^pdrrjg, the river Euphrates ; t) Ahvt] to opog, Mount Etna; StKeX/a ?) vrjtrog, the island of Sicily ; r) ttoXiq ol Tap- (Toi, the city of Tarsi. § 388. T\\Q possessive pronoun is precededby the Arti- cle when a single definite object is referred to : 6 Ifiog § 391. THE ARTICLE. 235 iraipog, my (particular) friend ; Ifiog haipog, a friend of 7)iine. § 389. aurocj as ^ jpredicate, ^\xi before or after a sub- stantive with the Article, means self: avTog 6 TraTrip or 6 irarrip avrog, the father himself ipse pater ; but as an at- tribute it is put between the Article and the substantive, and means sam^e : 6 avrog dvrjp, the same man, idem vir. With the demonstrative jpronouns ovrog, 6§c, iKuvogy a substantive, not being a predicate, has regularly the Article : ovrog 6 dvrip or o dvrip ovrog, this 7nan y Ikhvo rb ^iopov, that gift. But when the substantive is a predicate the Article is wanting : Iv Uepdmg vo/uog ejC|oarr/C ovctva twv TToXiTwv -n^iKtitjEv, Socrates acted unjustly to none of his fellow-citizens. § 397. Not unfrequently the verb of a jDrincipal clause takes as its object what should properly be the subject of a subordinate clause : Kai fioi TOV vibv eiTre, d /xeixdOjjKS Trjv rexvrjv, more animated than Kai fioi dire, d 6 vibg ii£nd9r]Ke ri^v texvtjv, and tell me about my son, whether he has learned his trade. Compare § 519, 5, Obs. 2. § 398. b) The Accusative of the external Object is used with the verbs : ^^vyw (compare fugio), a7ro^i^pa(TKw, I run away from ; <^0avw, / get before ; OtjpaM, OrfpEvcj, I hunt after; fxifuLiojuai (compare imito?'), ZrjXoto, T rival ; afxhi^ofxaiy I repay, I respond to ; XavOavo) (compare lateo), ekXeitto) (compare deficio); IkXeitth jU£ 17 iXirig, spes me deficit. 238 THE INTERNAL OBJECT. § 399. § 399. c) This Accusative is farther used with verbs of emotion : al^eoimm, aKTX^vofxaiy I am ashamed {tov iraripa, hefore my father) ; ^vXarTojiai, ivXap>iojiai, I am on my guard against; Qappiti), I have confidence (rriv i(Txyv,in my strength) ; eKirXriTToiuai, KaTairXriTToiuai, I am amazed at ; similarly with ojuvvjui, I swear hy {tovq Oeovg, the gods). Obs. — As witli oiivvfii, so in exclamations, the Accusative is used even without a governing verb : vai fia tov Ata, Tes^ ly Zeus ! (§ 643, 16). § 399 J. The S^ace and Time over which an action ex- tends are often expressed by the Accusative : koivtiv oSoy riXOoiuLw, yje came hy a common road ; Horn. KXifiaKa v\prj\riv KarefdrjaETo, she came down the high ladder ; ir\uv BaXacraav, to navigate the sea ; evravOa Kvpog ifxuvE nuipaQ irivre, there Cyrus remained five days. Compare § 405. On the Accusative of the aim^ see § 406. § 400. 2. The Internal Object is expressed by the Accusative not only with transitive, but also with intransitive and passive verbs. The internal Object is : a^ a word of cognate origin with the verb : Horn. a^Ckoi ^' h-ii^ aWrjm judxriv Ijulolxovto irvXy^aiv, alii circa alias jportas jpugnam jpugnahant ; retx^? ruxCCovTai, they wall (build) a wall ; TrojUTrrjv TrifXTreiv, to send an escort, make a solemn procession ; KaKiarrjv ^ovXeiav b^ov\ev(T£v, he served the worst service (endured the worst slavery) ; Hom. rt[» TTEiaeai 6q kev apicTTriv jdovXrfv f^ovXevtr^, you will obey him who advises (gives) the best advice; rr\v ivavriav voaov vocTovfiEv, we suffer (sicken) from the ojyposite sick- ness ; fjLEyaXrjv Tiva Kpimv Kpiverai, he is judged (tried) in a great trial ; b) or a word akin to the verb in m^eaning / irkriyriv tvtt- rsrai /3a/ourarnv, he is struck a very severe blow ; iraaag § 402. DOUBLE OBJECT. 239 vocTovg KajjLVH, he suffers from all diseases ; poet, o^vpfxara yoacrOai, to moan lamentations / ttoXejuov e oTjoarevo-av rov hpbv KoXovjULEvoVfthey marched out to the so-called holy war ; ypacpriv ^iwKuv, to pursue with a lorit (compare ypa(l)rjv ypa^EcrOai) ; c) or a substantive defining the verb : ^OXv/xiria vikuv, to conquer in the Olympic games ; ydfiovg lormv, to give a marriage-feast; Horn. vo(Trov odvpojUBvoi, weeping for the return ; fxivm irvHovTEg 'Axato/, the courage-hreathing Achceans ; ayyeXiriv eXOnvyto go a message; nvp ocjiOaX- fioim ^e^opKtjg, looking fire with the eyes (flashing fiery- looks) ; d) or the result of the action expressed by the verb : IeXkoq ovraaai, to strike a wound (produce by blows) ; op- fcm raixvHVyfoedus ferire,i.e.,fo6dus hostiam feriendo ef ficere / poet. i\^i. (17 avap\ia) rpoirag Karapprtyvvcn, it (an- archy) hreaJcs flight, i. e., produces flight by breaking through the ranks. § 401. Often, especially in the poets, a neuter adjective or pronoun in the Accusative is added to a verb as a special qualification, almost like an adverb (§ 400, c) : oXiyov cnrtivat, to he a little way off; jxiy a \pev^eTaif he tells a great lie (compare /miya xl^^v^og \pevdsTai) ; tov- T o \aip(i), at this I rejoice ; ri ^^prtcrojuiai rovrtoj what use shall I make of this f ir avra Trdaofihi, I will ohey in all things. § 402. 3. Double Object. Many verbs have a double object, consequently a double Accusative ; the following, which most frequently occur with this construction, may serve as examples : ^^i^ddKii) {e^i^a^av tov irai^a rriv fxovmKi]v, docuerunt jpuerum mu- sicam) r KpvTTTOjf I hide ; Ipwrdu), I ask ; aiTicj, I demand; TrpcLTTOfiai, I acquire {dpyvpiov rovg irapovrag, money from those who are present); kukov Xiyto rovg axOpovg, I speak 240 DOUBLE OBJECT. § 403. ill of my enemies ; a(^aipko}xai, cnrocTTepioj, I deprive of/ avajuiiuvrjCTKU), I remind of/ Ivtvii), kiK^iivvviii, I put on {tlvcl ')(^iTU)va, a coat on some one) ; Tr^pi^aWofxai, I encircle {ruxn TYiv itoKlv, the city with walls). Horn. : 17 ^£ jiiyav larov vtpaivev ^iirXaKa, she wove a double garment at the loom (§ 399, h), Obs. 1. — In the passive construction the thing remains in the Accu- sative : diSdcTKOfxai ttjv fiovaiKrjV'^ a roiig irXdcTTa exovrag ev^ai/uLOveaTa t o v g vojiiZii), I do not deem those possessing most the happiest ; -Kapi^^ l/uavrov evTTBiOriy I show myself obedient ; cXa/Be tovto ^tj pov, he received this (as) a gift. Obs.— The want of the Article often of itself distinguishes the pre- dicative accusative from the objective (§ 378). In the passive construction both Accusatives must become Nominative*, accord- ing to § 392. § 404. 5. In a freer way the Accusative is joined to 4®i- § 405. DOUBLE 0BJE®4: 241 verbs and adjectives, to point out to wliat the idea of these words refers, in Teference to what tliey- are to be understood : Ka/xvw Tr\v k^(^ a\y]v,I suffer in the head (compare § 400, h) ; o^ikoq ircKrav a^iKiav, unjxist in every (kind of) injustice (in every way, compare § 400, a)\ "EXXrjveg elm to y ivog, they are Greeks in race; ev txojuev TO. (Tw fiara, we are well in hody ; Hom. o/x- fxar a koX ic £ a X ?) v 'iKeXog Ail repTTiKepavviOf in eyes arid head like thunder-loving Zeus ; wapOivog KoXri to tldog, a maiden heautiful in form, or of beautiful, form {facie pulchra) ; ouSeic avOptJirog avTog tt clvt a aoc^og, no 'inan is himself loise in every thing ; 6 Map(Tvag TroTajmog ukocfi KCLi irivTe iro^ag hx^ to tv pog, the River Ma/rsyas was twenty-five feet in breadth. This Accusative is called the Accusative of reference. Obs. — Hence a great number of independent, almost adverbial, Ac- cusatives : TO ovofxa, in name, by name ; to TrXtjOog^in number; t6v TpoTTov, in character ; tovtov tov TpoTrov, in this way ; tyjv w(l)povi(7Kov, Socrates, the son of Sojphroniscus ; MiKria- ^rig KliuLwvo g, Ifiltiades, son ofKimon; poet., At6c*'A/o- r^piq, Artemis, daughter of Zeus. § 410. J) The Neuter of the Article with a Genitive has very diflferent meanings (compare § 383) : to. tCjv 'EXXr^- vb) V, the affairs, interests, possessions of the Hellenes (com- pare ra 'EXXr]v«ica) ; to Tr\Q 6\Ljap\iag, the nature of the oligarchy y on the other hand, to tov ArjfiocrOivovg, the word of Demosthenes ; to. tCjv ^iKijjv Koiva, the property of friends is common. § 411. c) The idea of abode is to be supplied in the ex- pressions : HQ ^L^aaKoko v <^ofrav, to go to the master's (house), i. e., to go to school ; Iv or elg "Ai^ov (Homer, hv ^Ai^a o ^ofjioig, in Ilades^ dwelling, dominion), in or into the lower world. § 412. d) The Partitive Genitive (4)3 denoting a whole to be divided, is most common with numerals and superla- tives : TT o X X o I TMv ^AOr)vaiwvj multi Atheniensium ; tt o- TEpog TLJv aSfX^wv ; which of the two brothers f iravTojv apioTOQj omnium optimus ; but also with various adjec- tives: 01 (TTTov^aloi Tbjv TToXiTOJVfthe assiduous among the citizens. So, more freely in the Homeric poems : ^a OEawVf the divine one among goddesses; drijuov avrip, a man of the people ; and similarly, a v^j/o rwv pr^Topwv, a man from the number of the orators. 244 THE GENITIVE. § 413. The Partitive Genitive with names of places denotes the whole territory; e?)]3ai rrig Boiwriag, Thehes in Boeotia ; with Neuter pronouns it sometimes denotes a whole which is attained by degrees : dq tovto avoiag r}\9ov, eo usque insanice progressi sunt. Obs. — Adjectives wliicli have a Partitive Genitive sometimes follow the gender of the Genitive dependent upon them : 6 rj/xKrvg tov Xpovov, the half of the time (instead of to ijixiav tov xpovov) ; ») TrXdaTT] TfjQ x<^P«C, '^^^^i of ihe land. § ^13. e) The Objective Genitive (5, e) may be translated by various prepositions: wvoia tCjv (I}l\ix)v, benevolence tovmrd friends ; airopia aiTovyWant of food; Hom./f^oc l^x\rvoq i\^\ iTOTr\To Qy eagerness for food and drinh ; riavxia Ix^P^ ^y J9^(2C6 from enemies ; ayihvig Xoyw v, contests in speeches ; cKpopfxri Epytjv, stimulus to deeds; aTrocrramc T(i>v ^AOrivaiwv, defection from the Athenians ; Xvmg OavaTov, deliverance from death ; j3/g iroXirw v, with violence against the citizens, in spite of the citizens. 2- Genitive loith Adjectives and Adverbs. % 414. The Genitive is joined to many relative adjec- tives and their adverbs, i. e., to such adjectives and adverbs as are conceivable only in reference to something, and points out the person or thing they refer to. The most important adjectives of this kind are : 1. KoivoQy common; l^iog, olKHog, own, peculiar, and oth- ers which imply property or belonging to, as : vaog hpbg TOV 'AttoXXwvoc, ^ temple sacred to Apollo (possession, compare § 408, 2). 2. Adjectives denoting j^Z^wi^^/ ^^^ want (contents, § 408, 3), as: iuL£GT6gftiunr\sii)g,TrX7] prig, full; ifKovaiog, rich ; Iv ^BTig, wivrig, necessitous ; farther, the adverb aXig, enough : iravTa EV(l)pO(Tvvr}g irXia i]v, all was full of joy. 3. Those signifying acquainted or imacquainted with : llxiTupog, peritiis ; aireipog, imperitus ; lTri(TTrifxu)v, sldlled § 416. THE GENITIVE. * 245 (rixvv^, in o^Ti art)\ fjLvyjjudJv, ajuvrjjuwv, mindftd and un- mindful. 4. a^ioQy worthy j ava^ioQy unworthy ; TrXeUrov a^iov, worth most, the worthiest thing (§ 408, 6); 5. Adjectives implying participation (§ 408, 4), whether it be positive or negative: fiiroxog tov 7r6vov,particeps laboris; ajxoipog, without a share j' ainog, author, guilty, reus. . Obs. — To these belong many adjectives compounded with dv (d, § 360) privative, which, especially in poets, are joined with the genitive : poet. aio)v kukCov dyevarog, a life which has not tasted of misfortunes ; cpiXbJv uKXavrog, unwept ty friends. 6. Adjectives in -iKog (§ 351) denoting capability or fit- ness for (compare 3) something : ^L^aGKokiKoq jpa/uiuaTiKrig, capable of teaching grammar ; TrapacTKevaariKbg tcjv ug rbv TToXcjuoy, skilled in obtaining the necessaries for war. § 415. Many Adverbs of Place are joined with a Geni- tive, which is mostly of a Partitive nature (compare § 412): TTou yfie; where on earth? so with IvTog, within ; aW, inside; iKTog, without ; t^oj, outside/ o.yxi) lyyvgy nXtj- aiov, near; Trpoo-w or ir 6 ppto, forward ; iripay beyo'nd ; evOv, straight towards ; irporrOev, tjULTrpocrOev, in front; om- (rOeVf behiiid; djKliOTipwdiv, on both sides; avh), upward (TTora/xwi', up-stream^) \ and corresponding with these also some adverbs of time and manner : TrrjvUa Trjg rjl^epag ; at what time of the day f iruig 'i^^ig rfjc yvh)fxr)g ; what do you think? XaOpa ra>y yoviwv, secretly from the parents. § 416. The Comparative may have the object with which, any thing is compared in the Genitive (as in the Abla- tive in Latin) : iulh^wv tov d^eX(l>ovj major fratre, i. e., rj 6 d^iX(l)6gy than the brother; ov irpogmu rbv apxovra TMV dpxo/mhujv irovrfpOTepov uvai, i. e., rj rovg dpxofiivovg, it is not becoming that the governor should be worse than the governed. Obs. 1. — This Genitive is used most frequently where it represents 246 THE GENITIVE. § 417. y with the Nominative or Accusative ; yet it may also more freely represent ?/ with the Dative : poet. TrXejwv xp^^^^Qi '^^ ^^'^ /^' apkcTKuv ToiQ KCLTio Tuiv tvOd^E (tj Tolg tvOdSe), longer is the time that I must please those below than tJmt I must please those here. Obs. 3. — Like th6 Comparative, the Superlative is sometimes joined with the Genitive of the things with which any thing is com- pared : poet. 7 and 10) with verbs which denote being., becoming^ making., deeming.^ in order to predicate something of a substantive, as originating from, possessing, consisting of, or in any other way qualifying it, § 408 : SwK/oarTjc ^(i)(l)povi(Ticov rjv, Socrates was Sojphroniscus' s son (§ 408, i); i] oiKia rov irarpog tyivtroy the house became the fathers jpro^erty (§ 408, 2); TO rCiyoq \iOov TTfTrotrjraf, the wall has been made of stone (§ 408, 3) ; ol eEcro-aXoi rwv 'EXX?}vwv naav, the Thessalians belonged to the Hellenes (§ 408, 4) ; TroXt- Tov ajaOov vojuiZeTai Oappuv, to be courageous is deemed a good citizen! s quality (§ 408, 8). Obs. — The Genitive often occurs with verbs of perception and ob- servation in such a way that it is properly dependent on a noun or pronoun : tovto vfiajv ndXiara Oavixd^oixev, this we most admire in you (properly : this of you we most admire). § 418. 2. The Genitive of Material (§ 408, 3) is also used with verbs oi plenty and want (compare § 414, 2): iripnrXrijiL, ir\r]p6ii),I fill ^' irXi^Bw, y^jjib), I a7n full ; ^eojuai (Sti poi), I need ; ra wra iviirXridav ^aipoviag aocpiag, they filled the ears with wondrous wisdom; 6 irapwv Katpbg § 419. THE GENITIVE. 247 TToXXijc (ppovTi^og KaX j3ouXr/c ^iiTai, the jpresent time is in need of much reflection and advice. % 419. 3. The Partitive Genitive (§ 408, 4) is used with many verbs which only jpartially affect the object of the action : a) With all verbs which contain the idea of sharing : luieTi\u) {jiiTiiGTL fjiQi), I have a share in ^ jmeTaXajildavti),! take a share in ; jueTa^iEufxi, I give a share (rJjc Atmc, of the booty) \ KOLvijjviw, I share (compare § 414,5); Hom. aiTOv 8' al^oiT] rafiir} TrapiOr^Ke ^apiZ^Ofxivr] Trapaovrtuv, the modest stewardess brought bread sujpjplying from the store. *Obs. — oCo),I smell, also belongs to these: jivpojv 6K^i,he smells of myrrh. b) With verbs which denote touching^ laying hold of seizing : airroixai, xpavw, I touch ; txofiaiy I hold by, border {Tivoq) on something^' avTi\oiJiai, l-rriXafiptavofiaL, I lay hold of; Xafij^avu) Tiva T7}g ^iLpog,! seize one by the hand ; ap\o\mi, I begin (r ^ c tt a t ^ 1 1 a c, with the educa- tion)-, poet, ^avovrtiiv ov^lv aXyog airrf^rai, no jpoAn touches the dead. c) With verbs which denote striving, aiming at : oro- Xa^ofxai Tov gkottov,! aim at the- goal ; optyoimai, /strive; ^ixpaw, I thirst,; rvy\aviii, I hit, attain (fVux^ twv aOXwv, he wo?i the prizes); l(lnKvovnai, I reach, attain; r'lKw, I have attained (Herod, ^vvafxiog, power). d) With verbs which denote enjoying : laOiw, I eat ; irivw,! drinJc ; y^vu),! give a taste; k(jTiab), I entertain; aTToAaww, / enjoy {imeyifTTwv ayadwVf the greatest blessings); tvog av^pog iv (Ppovriaavrog TroXAot av diroXavaEiav, inany %oould enjoy a man who has thought sensibly. e) With verbs denoting the opposites of the ideas enu- merated under a — d, that is, the exclusion from a share in something: a-i\o^ai, I refraiii {gltov , abstineo cibo); x!^- pitii) , I separate ; upyw^I keep off; aripicsKM , I deprive ; TTavojuai, I cease; tiKw, Trapa\iopi(x), I yield ; Xuw, / loose ; 248 THE GENITIVE. § 420. IXevOepou), I free j t^u^o^xai, I sjpare ^ afiapTavii), cnrorvy- yavu),I miss,' \piv^opai, ac^iaWofxaiy I aon deceived {rrig IXiri^ogy in my ho])e). Obs. — Many of these verbs are also joined with an Accusative when an object is to be expressed as wholly encompassed by the action : irXdarov fispog rivog /zfrixetv, to Jiave the greatest part in any thing; irivio oJvov, I drinJc wine; qivov, some wine; Xayxavio ri, I attain something; rtvog, a share in something. § 420. 4. The Genitive is joined with many verbs de- noting a sensuous or m^oral jyerception or emotion (com- pare § 414, 3), as: aKOvtj, aKpoaofiai, I hear j aKrOavofiai, I perceive ; iiifxvy] Crmsus ruled over the Lydians) ; jSao-iXeuw, / ride ; iripiup.i, -rrepiyiyvo- fxaijlam sicperior ; -nrraoimaL {inTwy ufxi), I am inferior; Xdiro/bLai, v(TTepi(ij,Iam behind; ^ta^apw TivoQfdiffero ab aliquo ; fiap^aptov "EXXrjvag apx^tv aicoc, '^t is reasonable that Hellenes should rule over barbarians. § 424. 8. The Genitive is joined with verbs compounded with prepositions, which either always, or in the sense which they have in the compound verb, require the Gen- itive (compare Chapter XVII.) : £ic/3aXXw tlvcl rifxrig, I eject sotne one from office ; irpoaraTzvu rf)(,* iroXzwQ, he pre- sides over the state ; 1povuv nvog, to desjpise any one; Karriyopdv tl tivoq^Io accuse one of a thing ; Trarpiov yv rri ^AOrjvaiiov woXei TrpoeGravai tu)v 'EXXr/vwv, it VMS a hereditary custom for the city of the Athenians to be at the head of the Hellenes. 4. Freer use of the Genitive. § 425. The Genitive, without immediate connection with a noun or verb, expresses : 1. Place (local Genitive), almost exclusively in the lan- guage of poetry, and that eithei^ the place fro7n which something is removed : '[(rraaOe [5adpo)Vf get up from the stej)s; virayuv rf/c oSou, to go out of 'the way (compare § 419, e) ; — or the space within which something takes place (compare §§ 412, 415) : rfjc 'Iwvmc tovto ai(s\pov vevo/uiiaTai, within Ionia that is considered disgraceful; Hom. i;f<^oc oh (^taiv^To iraariq yairig, no cloud ajppeared within the com/pass of the whole earth ; ip^ovTai ir^^ioio, they go through or within thej^lain (compare the German ich gehe des Weges). On another local Genitive, see § 412. L2 250 THE DATIVE. § 426. § 426. 2. Time (temporal Genitiv^),in which case it is a Partitive Genitive expressing the whole of a space of time (§ 412) within which something takes place: rpig Tov IviavTov, thrice in the yeai* j i]fxipag,hy day j vvKTog, hy night y tov avTov yiifjLwvoQf in the same winter j tov XoLTTovyfor the future ^' \p6vov av\vov,for some timej iKaaTov tTovg, each year. § 427. 3. Cause (causal Genitive, compare § 408, 7, § 422), in exclamations : otjuoi Trig rvyr\g^ alas ! for my fortune (compare the German O des Leides) ; and in In- finitives with the Genitive of the Article (in order to). § 574, 3, Ohs, § 428. 4. Occasion, time, circumstances, etc., as an al>so- lute Genitive, in connection with participles, just like the absolute Ablative in Latin : Kvpov (iamXevovTog, Gyro reg~ nante, § 584 (compare the German : stehenden Fusses), Obs. — The absolute Genitive very rarely occurs, like the absolute Ablative of the Latins, without a participle ; when the verb to le occurs in the clause the participle u)v is to be used : te jpuero^ aov Traiddg uvtoq. E) The Dative. § 429. The Dative denotes, in general, the person or thing more remotely connected with an action. Obs. — The Dative, therefore, depends just as often on verbs as on adjectives (adverbs), but very rarely on a substantive. § 430. 1, Dative d6vog /mijKTTov kukov Toig i)(ov(Tiv avTov, envy IS the great- est evil to them that have it. 432. h) the possessor with tt/xf, yiyvoimai, and similar verbs: iroXXoi fioi cjiiXoi daiVy I have many friends. Obs. — The possessive Dative is sometimes, like the Genitive, joined with a Substantive : Herod., 61 a^t /Sdee, their oxen. • § 433. c) the symjpathizing person (ethical Dative) : poet, w tLkvov, y\ f3l(5wsv r\iiLv 6 ^ivog ; O child, has the stranger left us f ri yap Trarfip juoi irpia^vg Iv ^o/ulokti ^pa ; for what is my aged father doing in the house f § 434. d) the acting person with passive verbs (common- ly vTTo with the Genitive), which is then to be viewed as one interested in the action : Hom. iroXUg ^ajuev "Eicro/ot S/q>, many were overcome by godlike Hector ; ri TriirpaKraL Toig aXXoig ; what has been done by the rest f This Da- tive is regularly joined with the Verbal Adj. in -Tiog : t/uoi TToXejUY^Ttov Igtiv, miM 2)ugrvaiyJiiim est. § 435. e) the person remotely connected with an action : riOvTix ^H-'^v TToXai, he died to you long ago-; Hom. wcktiv 252 THE DATIVE. § 436. Ksv TpwecTGi Kv^og apoio, thou mightest get thee fame with all Trojans ,' Horn. toIglv avtcrrr}, among them arose ; vtto- Xafi^avHv ^a ti^ toiovtm on tv{}Or}g laTiv, in regard to such a one we must su^pjpose him simjple. Obs. — In this manner participles are most frequently used, partly with, partly without, an accompanying noun : Hom. 77/tiTv dvarog i(TTi 7repiTpo7rsu)v iviavroQ IvOdde fiifivovreaffiv, it is tJie ninth year Jar us lingering here; r) diaj3dvTi tov Trorafibv irpbg koTrkpav 6d6g, the road westward when you have crossed the river ; yiyverai n tfioi (3ovXofisv(p, something ha/ppens to me as I wish; crweXovrt. or mq avv^XovTi eiTreiv, to spealc briejly. § 436. 3. Dative of community. With verbs, adjectives, and adverbs, which denote com- munity, agreement, friendly or hostile meeting, the person or thing with which such a community, agreement, or such a meeting takes place, is in the Dative. a) Verbs of this kind are : Koivajvuv, I share {rivi rtvoc, something with one) ; crvfKJiwviu), o/uioXoyiu}, eculiar ; Koivog, common (compare 414, l); vjuivvv/Liog, of like name; cruv- wvvjuog, of like meaning; ^taport one; TrspiiriTrTstv nvi, to meet one. § 438. 4. The Instrumental Dative, answering to the Latin Ablative, denotes that hy or hy means of which an action is brought about ; hence «) the "means or instrument (compare Sta, § 458) : Horn. rov fjilv Kara GTrjOog f3a\s ^ovpi, the one he struck on the breast with the spear; optjfxev To1g o^daXpoXg, we see with the eyes ; ov^ug iiraivov ri^ova7g licr/jo-aro, 7io one gained praise by pleasures ; Zvimiovv nva Qavarix), to punish one loith death ; Horn. Tiauav Aavaol t/za ^aKpva aolm jScXeo-- mv, may the Danai pay for my tears by thy darts, Obs. — Hence the Dative is used with xp>l(TOai, to make use of; as the Ablative with uti in Latin. A second predicative Dative is often added (§ 361, 10) : tovtojv nai (pvXa^iv txpn'^'o, some of them he used as guards. . § 439.^) the operating power or cause from which an action proceeds : avOpioirog (pvcreL ttoXitikov, man {is) by nature fitted for the state ; iroXXaKig ayvoia a/uLapravoiuev, we often err from ignorance ; (j)6(5uj, from fear. Obs. — With verbs of emotion, the Dative expresses the ground or occasion of the emotion : tjdofiai, x«'P<^ ^y ixovaiKy, I delight in music; XvTTovfiai, I am grieved; %aX£7ratVw, / am angry; arkpyM^ ayaTrCJ^iI am satisfied (with something); aiaxvpofiat, lam ashamed (about something). § 440. c) the measure, by which a thing is measured, by which one thing surpasses another, by which it is dis- tinguished : TO. fxiXXovTa Kpivofiav Tolg y^'yzvr]fxivoig, thefu- 254 THE DATIVE. § 441. ture we judge ofhy the jpast ; dUa treat irpo rrig ev ^a\a- fjiivt fxa\r]g ot ^ Adr]vaioi Iv MapaOiovL fy/jcrjcrav, te?l years hefore the hattle of Salamis the Athenians conquered at Marathon; noXXi^) /ndZivv, multo major (also ttoXv, § 404, Ohs^\ ^ia(piptiv Tivog ^povi]m, off, away, § 453. 3. Ik, before vowels e? (Lat. ex, e), out of (op- posed to Etc), denotes removal from within or from among : ^) of place : Ik. ^iraprrig (pEvyei, he is banished out of Sparta. b) of time : Ik iTal^b)v,from boyhood {a pueris). c) of origin,: Ik warpbg xprjaTov lyiveTO,he sprang from a brave father ; seldom with a Passive verb: rifiacfOai ek Tivog, to be honored by any one. d) close connection and conformity with : after, secun- dum : Xoyov Ik Xoyov Xtyeiv, to deliver speech after speech; 258 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE. § 454. tK tC)v o/jtoXoyovjuhwv, according to the agreement (Lat. -secundum). Phrases : Ik ^t^iag, on the right ; l^ 'laov, egtially; ^ricrai, Kptfxaaai tl Ik rivog, to fasten^ to hang one thing to another (Lat. ^endlre ex, ah aliqua re). In compounds : out, away. § 454. 4. 7rp6ilLi2ii.j>rd), for, before, instead. a) of place, before : irpo OvpCJv, before the door. b) of time : irpo Tr\q /xa^rjc, before the battle. c) of preference : irpo tovtwv TsOvavai fxaXXov av 'iXoiro, he would choose death before this, i. e., rather than this. d)for, a rare use : ir-pb irai^wv fxaxecrdai, to fight for the children. Phrase : irpo ttoXXoO iroidaOai (c), to prefer greatly. In compounds: before, forth, beforehand, forwa7'd. § 455. The spurious Prepositions : 5. ay£v, without (poet. X(i)pig, ^ixa, arep), 6. a\pi, fiixpif until. 7. pera^v, between. 8. 'ivEKa, also evtKev, tiveKa (poet. ovviKo), for the sake of an object to be attained (Lat. causa): rfjc vyieiag evsKa Xpwp^Qa rq> larpiio, we employ a physician for the sahe of health. (Compare ^m with Ace, § 458, B.) 9. 7rX?)v, besides {proeter). Obs. — Tr\r]v is often used quite adverbially without governing a case : poet, ovk ap 'AxaioXg dv^peg dai ttXtiv oh ; huTe then the Achmns no men hut this ? It might be TrXrjv roUe, besides this ? § 456. C) Prepositions tvith the Dative. 1. Iv (Hom. Ivi, Iv, Lat. in, c. Ablat., and inter), in, an- swers to the question where ? a) of place: Iv ' AOrjvaig, in Athens ; also a77iong (inter) : tv TovToig, among them; Iv ^po) XijEiv, to speak before the people (compare § 449, o). § 458. prepositTions with the gen. and acc. 259 . h) of time : Iv tovtoj r^i tVff, in that year. c) a moral relation : with : Iv to} Otoj to ttiq fxaxnQ riXog, the result of the hattle rests vnth God. Phrases: 77 Iv MapaOtJvL juaxn^ihe hattle at Marathon ; Iv Toiq TTpCjTog, first hy far j iv KaipCjt, at the right time ; iv 7rpoqdi]K.r]Q jiipu,in addition^' iv xt^pGi Ti9ivai,to put into the hands (compare Lat. in mensa ponere). In compounds : in, into, on. The accented ivi — tveaTi signifies it is in, it exists, it is possible. § 457. 2. avv or ^vv (Lat. cum), with, denotes compan- ionship (opposed to av^v, compare fx^Ta with Gen., § 464, B) ; (Tvv 'A9{}vy syt/crjo-cv, he conquered {with the help of) Athene y avv v6p.i^)yin accordance with the law (opposed to irapa with Acc, § 465, C, h). . In compounds : with, together. 11. Prepositions which can have two Cases. The Genitive and Accusative. Obs. — Here, as every where in what follows, that use of a Preposi- tion is placed first in which its original meaning is most mani- fest. § 458. 1. ^la (akin to Sue, as between is to two [twai^i]), originally between, then through. A) with the Genitive : a) of space : most frequently throtcgh (Lai. per) : Hom. Sm fxlv cKTTTi^og ffXOe (jtaeivrjg oj^pi^ov ij^OQ, through the glittering shield pierced the mighty lance. b) insti'umental : by or vnth : Sm rwv oc^tdaXjuiiov opw/mev, by (by means of) the eyes we see (compare § 438). c) of space and time : a^nong {inter), during, in : ^la yjiipC)v 'ix^iv, to have in hand j 3(a vvKTog, during night y ^la (piXiag livai, to be on friendly terms. • Phrases : ^la aTo/xaTog tx^iv, to have in the motcth, to 260 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GEN. AND ACC. § 459. be talking about; ^i' ovdsvog iroLuaQai, to deem as nothing ,' ^la fxaKpov, after a long interval^ interruption. B) with the Accusative : a) of space and time, almost exclusively in the poets : through, during : Horn. Sm Stj/maTa, through the rooms / diet vvKTa, during night. h) usually causal : on account ^(the operating cause) (compare f vfica, § 455, 8) : ^m tr\v voaov xptJjueOa t(^ larpt^, we employ the physician on account of the illness. Phrases : avroq St kavrov, by himself; Sia tl ; why f In compounds, Sta is through, or denotes separation, like Lat. dis' : ^ia(^ipii)=differre, diaipio), I sever. § 459. 2. Kara (compare Adv. icarw, dow7i), originally downward, down (the opposite to avd). A) with the Genitive : a) of space : down from : Hom. /3r) ^t icar OvXviuiroio Kap{]VLov, he came down from the heights of Olympus ; helow {sub) : to. kuto. yrig, things below the earth. b) tropically : about, against : Xtytiv Kara nvog, to speak about, against one. Phrases : ttoXlv kut uKpag eXuv, to capture a city com- pletely ; Kara vljtov, behind. B) with the Accusative it denotes in its most general sense extension over, relation to, direction toward some- thing : a) of place : Kara poov, down a stream ; Kara yriv koX OdXatraav, by land and sea ; Hom. Zeitg t/Br? Kara ^aiTa, Zeus went to the feast. b) of time : kut Ikhvov tov xp^^^^f ^^ ^^^^ time; -ol KaO' i7Mac, Our contemporaries. c) of other relations : Kara tovtov tov rpoirov, in this way ; Kara Trdvra, in every respect ; Kara ^vvajMv, accord- ing to ability, as much as possible ; Kara rovg vojuovgy in accordance with the laws; kut Ifit, as regards one; Kara Uiv^apov apiGTov vdwp, according to Pindar, water is best. § 461. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DAT. AND ACC. 261 d) distributive in divisions : Horn. Kara (^tvKa, hy tribes ; Kara rpttg, by threes / kuO' r]fxipav, daily. In compounds : dow7i, downward, against, toward, very often untranslatable. 5 460. 3. viripl Horn, also vwup (Lat. super), radical mean- ing over. A) with the Genitive : a) of sjpOAie : 6 r\kioq virlp tjiulujv iropeveTai, the sun passes over us. J) tropically, y6>/'.' fxax^aOai virip rivoq, to fight for any one (originally over, e. g., over a corpse) : 6 v-Klp r^c Tra- Tpi^oq Kt'v^uvpc, the danger for one^s country; instead of: lyuj virlp (Tou airoKpivovjiaL,! will answer instead of you. B) with the Accusative : over, beyond — oi space and oneasure : Horn, vir'^p oh^ov tj5n ^^ have in hand (compare ^la) : fxeO' r]fiipav, interdiu. In compounds : with, after, trans- {jueTaTiOevai, trans- § 465. 4. wapa (Hom. 7rap,Trapai), radical meaning he- side, near. A) with the Dative : at or near : Hom. Trapa vr\\)a\ Koptoviat fxifjivaZiLv, to linger 264 PREPOSIT. WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. § 466, near the curved shijps ,' koI irap' lp.oi tiq ifxirupia lro])oses (writes down) a law ; 6 KaT{]yopog ypa<^iTai TOV adiKtiaavTa, the accuser prosecutes (has the name writ- ten down) the wrong doer ; TijumypC) nviyl help one; tijulu)- povfiai Tiva, I avenge 7nyselfon one; aipC)yItake, alpovjuai, I choose ; ^aveiZ^M, I put out to interest; ^avdZofiai, I borrow at interest; irudM, I persuade, irudofiai, I allow myself to be persuaded, I obef. One and the same Middle may occur in different senses : didddKoixai (4), I catcse to teach, or (1) / teach myself, learn ; rpsTrofim (1), / turn myself, or (2) / turn to myself; rpkirovTai rag yviofiag, they change their opinion ; Tpk-xovTai tovq -n-oXefiiovg, they turn away (put to flight) the enemy (§ 479, Obs.). § 483. Obs. — The deponents are distributed among the different kinds of Middle verbs, and differ from the verbs mentioned only by having no active form. Thus v-n-itrxvovfiai, I pledge myself, is a direct Middle ; but dexo/Jiat, I receive ; KTaojiai, I acquire, are indirect ; ayia- USE OF THE TENSES. 273 vii^ofiai, I contend ; olfxai, Ithink^ are subjective : dvafSidjcraaQai, to revivCy is causative. On the Passive Deponents, § 328. § 483. 3. The Passive Voice has a freer use in Greek than in Latin, viz. : 1. even such verbs as in the Active take a cliiFerent case from the Accusative, form a Passive : Karafppovio tivoq (§ 4:24:), I despise one j KaTacppovuTai rig vii ijuov ; tticttev- ovcFi rti> j3a(Ti\H, they trust the king/ o ^acriXkvg TrtcrreuErat vtt' avTwv ; tTTfjSouXfvfi Tt[t TroXcju/tj), he plots against the enemy ; 6 TroXifxiog sTrij^ovXeveTm vtt' avrov, a plot is made against the enemy hy him. 2. Neuters of Passive participles may be formed even from intransitive verbs : ra (rrpaTavofiivay the warlike meas- ures ; TO. o-ot 7r£7roXtrfUjU£va, your political course^ your policy. 3. The exclusively Passive forms even of Deponents are sometimes used in a Passive sense ; (iiaZofxai, I force, £j3t- dffOiiv, I was forced; in like manner a Passive may be formed from a Middle : aipiu),I take, alpiojiai, VsL^s.^Iam chosen; iii:TeTreiui(j>Orj,he was sent for, fxETaTri^Trojxai, I send for (§ 479). Chap. XX. — Use of the Tenses. § 484. In marking the time, the Greeks distinguished : 1. The Order of time. The three Orders of time being the Present, the Past, and the Future. 2. The Kind of time. In regard to the Kind of time, an action is either a) going on, e. g., yiyvwcxKuv (gradually), to learn to know ; or, T)) momentary, e. g., yvCyvm, to perceive, know ; or, M2 274 USE OF THE TENSES. § 485. c) completed, e. g., lyvwKivai, to have learned, to know (Lat. nosse). Obs. — The momentary action may be compared to a point, the ac- tion going on to a line, and the completed action to a surface. An action going on is indicated by the forms of the Present-Stem. A monientamj action is indicated by the forms of the AoristStems. A completed action is indicated by the forms of the Perfect-Stem. The Future denotes the future Order of time of an ac- tion going on, as well as of a momentary action : yvtJCFOfim, I shall (gradually) get to 'hiow, and / shall perceive^ the Third Future (^futurum exactum) that of a completed action : lyvwKwg itrofiai, I shall have learned (Latin no- vero). In the Present, Aorist, and Perfect, only the Indicative indicates a definite Order of time; the other Moods, the Infinitive and the Participle, resemble the corresponding Indicative only in regard to the Kind, not in regard to the Order of time. The following table presents a general view of these relations : Present. Past. Future. Going on. Ind. Pres. Imperf. Subj., Opt, Imperat, Inf., Vart., of tJie Preserd. Momentary. Aor. Ind. Subj., Opt, Imperat, Inf., of the Aorist. Completed. Perf. Ind. Plupeif. Futurum exact Subj., Opt, Imperat., Inf., Part., of the Perfect. § 485. Ohs. — As the English as well as the Latin language gener- ally neglects the distinction between an action going on and a Mo- mentary action, it is difficult to comprehend it. A similar distinc- § 488. THE PRESENT INDICATIVE. -275 tion, however, may be perceived in some English verbs, as fiee ((pev- yeiv) and escape {(pvyCiv) ; flicker and flash ; fear (^ofStXaOai) and de frightened {^ojiriQiivai, deXaai) ; wonder {Oavfid^Eiv) and to be surprised {Oavfidaai) ; to he tusy about {TrpdaaHv) and to accomplish (irpd^ai) ; yeXdv, to be laughing, and yeXaaat, to burst out laughing. 1. Forms of an Action in Progress. a) The Present Indicative. § 486. Th^ Present Indicative denotes, as in English and Latin, an action going on or in progress at the jpresent time : iKErevofjiiv as Travrtg, we all imjplore thee. Hence by the Present are expressed general assertions, valid for all times, and therefore also for the Present: tari Qtog, there is a God. Obs. — Actions whose commencement indeed belongs to the Past, but whose effects extend to the Present, are sometimes expressed by this tense : aKovoj, I hear, also in the sense, / have heard and still bear in mind; vikuu), I conquer, i. e.,1 am victorious; ^evyw, I am banished; dhKkio,! am wrong (have done wrong); 9vr](jKu, he is dead. In this sense alone are used i]Kio,Iam come; o'ixofiai, I am gone. § 487. By a lively apprehension a past action may be represented as present, hence the use, very frequent in Greek, of the Historical Present, which frequently alter- nates with past tenses : poet, koi iriog oparai KaX ypiOr] ; and how is she seen, and was she captured f £7ra y]y Ciro ^ Apyi^afxoq koi liropevETO £7ri rovg avrnraXovgf IvravOa ovroi ouic idi^avTO Tovg TrepX tov ^Ap^ida/moVf aXX' eyKXivovcriv, as Archidamus tooh the lead and ^inarched against the enemy, the latter did not wait for the troops of Archidamus, hut retreat. § 488. I) The Imperfect is the Preterite of an action in progress, like the Latin Imperfect. The Greek therefore uses the Imperfect where he wishes to describe past states or past actions in their progress, in their continuance along with others, or in their frequent. 276 THE IMPERrECT. § 489. continued repetition : Horn, ol filv ap olvov i/iiayov Ivt Kpr)Tr\p(JL /cat v^wp, ol S' avTe (nroyyoKTi TroXvTpiiroKTi rpaTriZag viZ,ov Koi TTporiOev, tol ^l Kpea iroXXa ^aTevvTO, soiae were Tmngling wine and water in mixing-hoiuls, others cleaning tables withjporous sjxmges, and placing them^ the rest were carving triuch meat ; rovq p\v ovv TreXracFTag t^iE,avTo ol (5ap(5apoi KOL IfjLa^ovTOf the harharians met the peltasts^ and then were fighting^ — Horn. o<^pa pXv iiwg r> koX at^tro hpbv v/uap, To^pa paX ap(^OTipii)v (iiXe T^irTeTO, irTTrrs re Xaog, as long as it was morning^ and holy day increasing^ so long the darts ofhoth were striking and people falling. — ovTTOTi: puov aTr^dTpaTOTTi^ivovTO ol j5ap(5apoL tCov *EXXr]- vu)v i^riKovra (7Ta^i(Dv, the harharians (did not encamp) used never to. encamp*less them sixty stadia from the Hellenes. § 489. Obs. 1.— The Imperfect frequently expresses a merely at- tempted but not accomj)lisliecl action : Trputrog JiikeapxoQ tovq avrov aTparuoTag e/3id?£ro ievai, oi Se avrbv £/3aXXov, vcrrepov de tTret eyvw on ov dvvr}(T£rai (SidtracrOai, (Tvvrjyayev hKK\r]mav, first Glearchus tried to force his soldiers to go, hut they shot at him ; afterward, however, as he perceived he would not he able to force them, he sumrrmied a meeting. So idi^ov sometimes means he offered to give, to distinguisli it from tSwKEv, he gave. § 490. Ohs. 2. — The Imperfects of the verbs which denote should and must are used, just as in Latin, to denote what should be done in opposition to what was done : tda tovq XkyovTag fir^TE irpbg tx^pav TToiuadai Tov \6yov firjre irpbg x^^P^'^i '^^^ speakers ought to have made their speeches neither from fear nor from favor (Lat. oportebat) ; so xpn'^) ^'^ ought ; eiKog ijv, it would he fair. On the Imperf. with dv, § 494, Ohs. 1, and § 537, etc. § 491. c) The Suhjunctive,Optative, Imperative, Infniti^e, and Participle Present simply express an action in progress, whether it lie in the present, past, or future : paivo^iSa iravThg, o-rrorav opyiZw- peOa, we are all mad when we are angry ; Wzyov tm EvOvdvptf), oTL TravTEg LToipoi uev pavOavHv, they told Eu- thydemus that they were all ready to learn ; ovrw iroiriaw, § 492. THE AORIST INDICATIVE. 277 oTTwg av (TV KiXevyg, I loill do as you may hid irne {sic again, ut tic me agerejubehis)-, ravTa Xtywv 9opvj5ov riKovat, dia tCjv tcl^uov \6vtoq (cat r/jOtro, rig 6 Oofxvfdog ar;, saying this, he heard a noise pass through the ranhs, and ashed what the noise was. Obs. — These Present forms sometimes, like the Imperfect (§ 489), express a mere attempt : to dirodi^pdaKOVTa fxrj SvvaaOat cnro^pdvai TToXkri nojpia, for a man not to he able to run away when he tries to run away is great stupidity. § 492. 2. Forms of a Momentary Action. a) The Aorist Indicative is the Preterite of a Momentary action, and therefore de- notes the actual beginning of an action in the past^^ similar to the Historical Perfect of , the Latins. The Greeks employ the Aorist Indicative when they wish to narrate past facts, to state past actions simply as having happened, or to represent them as individual facts without reference to other actions : lara rrjv Iv Kopvjvuq. IJ.aj(r]v Of ^AOrivatoi t^lXiTTOv Tjjv BoiwTiav Traaavf^of^e?^ the hattle at Coronea the Athenians left all Boeotia; — Ilai;- aaviag Ik AaKe^aijuovog GTpaTYiyhg viro 'EXXrjvwv I^i7ri/Li(f)6ri ju^TCL eiKOCTi vEwv ttTTO YleXoTTOVvrjcTOv, ^vvtirXeov ^£ Koi 'A0»7- vaioi Tpiatzovra vavai kol laTpaT^vaav Ig Kvirpov koI avri^g ra TToXXa KaTECTTp^xfjavTo, Pausanias was sent out from Lace- dmmon as general hy the Hellehes, with tv^enty ships from the Peloponnese, hut Athenians also accompanied him (accompanying circumstance) with thirty ships, and they proceeded to Cyprus and subdued the greater part ofit; ro^iKtiv Kai laTpiKriv koX juavTiKrjv 'AttoXXwv gvevpev, Apollo invented the arts of archery, medicine, and prophecy ; — Hom. rr\v Sc ttoXu Tcpdrog '/& 1^7]ki\xayog Oaoeidrjg, j3ri S' lOvg TTpoOvpoiOf v^jJLia(jy]Br] 8' ivi Ov/ui^j ^dvov ^rjOa Ovpyjaiv t(j)e(TTap£Vy lyyvOi §£ (rrag xup fXe ^i^LTEpriv koL l^iK,aTO X'^Xkiov tjx'^^f ^^^i ^^^ ^r^^ Telemachus of form divine heheld,and he went straight to the porch, and was grieved 278 THE AORIST INDICATIVE. § 493. at heart that a stranger stood a long time at the door, and going near he took him hy the right hand and eased him of his hrazen sjpear. § 493. As the Aorist Indicative simply expresses an ac- tion as having taken place in the past, it answers to all the different Preterites in other languages, especially often in subordinate sentences to the Latin and English j^lii^perfect : Aaps'iog Kvpov /uieTaTriiunreTai (§ 487) airo rfjc ^PX^^ ^^ avTov aaTpdrrriv l7roir}(Ttv, Darius has Cyr^s sent for from the province, over which he had made him satrap {fecerat). Thus the Aorist is used with the Conjunctions of time/ lird, wcj oT^, as, when, like the Latin Perfect with post- guam, uhi, ut : wq 6 Kvpog rjaOsTO Kpavyrjc;, av£7rtjcr)(nv IttI top "ttttov w(T7rep hOovaitov, when Cyrus perceived (ut audivU) a cry, he sprang upon his horse like one inspired. § 494, The Aorist Indicative is used in statements of experience im- plying that a thing once happened^ but admitting an application to all times : poet. T Karairpa^ai, ttoXv S' tri fiuZov to Xa(56vTa ^ia(TU)(Taadai, I deem it a great thing to found a government, but a still greater to maintain it after acquiring it. Obs. — The Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, and infinitive Aorist, therefore, differ from the corresponding forms of the Present, just as the Aorist Indicative differs from the Imperfect ; the Aorist forms express a single fact, conceived as a i)oint, the Present, as a state or condition, sometimes of long duration : XaXsTrbv to Troieiv, to Ik KtKEixrai pg,diov, it is difficult to do, easy to command; el Try tx^ig avTiKkyuv, dvTiXeye ' ei de /x?;, Travaai TroXXocKig Xsyiov Tov avTov Xoyov, if you have any thing to say in reply, reply (even in a long speech), |/* Tiof, cease (at onco) frequently repeating the same statement. % 496. The Aorist Participjle regularly expresses some- thing which took place earlier or before the act of the prin- cipal verb : K/ooTo-oc "AXi»v ^laj^ag iueya\r}V apxrjv KaToXixTEi, Croesus, after crossing the Ilalys, will overthrow a great empire ; TraOwv ^i ra vriTriog tyvio (§ 494), after suffering {hy ^Vi^Qvmg) even a fool becomes 7c7iowing. Obs. — As the Aorist generally indicates the moment at which an action actually begins (§ 485), so the Aorist Participle also only expresses that the beginning of an action took place before an- other action, while its progress may continue simultaneously with that other : ytXdaag dire, he began to laugh and said (laughing) \risu oborto dixit]. Hom. tLSe de Tig eiTreaKev iSojv eg TrXrjaiov dXXov, thus would say many a one while looking at his neighbor; xaptcrai fiOL aTTOKpivdiuvog, answer and oblige Tne, inasmuch as the xapi(Taa9ai follows immediately after the beginning of the answer. 280 THE FUTURE. § 497. § 497. As the Aorist Indicative may frequently be translated by the Pluperfect (§ 493), so also the Aorist Optative and Infinitive in asser- tions generally denotes something which took place lefore : oX 'IvUl iXe^av on Tre/x-ipeie (r7' and with ref- erence to the Present : poet. X070C \i\iKTai irag, the whole speech has hcen sjpohen [dixi'] ; evprjKa, I have found, I have it / Hom. 7]^r] yap r^TtXaaTai a fioi (j)iXog tiOeXe Ov/nog, for noiu has been finished what my dear soul desifed ; 17 TToXfc 'iKTicfrai irapa twv KopivOicjVf the city has heen founded hy the Corinthia^ns (of a still existing city) ; to. XprijuaTa TOig irXovaloig 17 ^vx^ ou ^e^uypr^Tai aXXa cecaveiKEv, Fortune has not given, hut lent (at interest) their unoney to the rich. § 503. Ohs. — Several Perfects have an entirely Present meaning, inasmuch as they present in a completed state the action of which the gradual accomplishment is expressed by the present : fiinvfjr] livai, si qua civ- ((• BESITYJ § 526. MOODS IN DEPENDENT ASSEBTlIONSJ^WCCv 289 itas contra [aliam'\ civitatem pugnatura ess€i:pmmfti hano se dixit iturmn: In this case, however, the Indicative also is admissible according to § 520, but never the Subjunctive, even after a Principal tense, its employment being limited to the case mentioned in § 527. § 524. 5. The Potential Optative (with av) may occur in Dependent, in the same sense as in Independent, sentences (§ 516), to denote something as merely possible: Xlyw, qtl TovTo ovK av yivoLTo, I say that this probably could not happen. The farther use of the Moods in Dependent sentences is treated of specially in what follows, according to the differ- ent kinds of Dependent sentences. I. Moods in Dependent Assertions and in De- pendent Interrogative Sentences. § 525. Sentences containing Dependent assertions are those which annex the substance of a speech or opinion to a Principal sentence by means of the conjunctions, on, wc, that ; Dependent or indirect Interrogative sentences are connected with the Principal sentence by means of £/, ifj TTorepov . . . ri \utTum . . . a7i\, whetlier . . . or (in double ques- tions), or Interrogative Pronouns (§ 214) or Adverbs. § 526. 1. The Indicative is used in those sentences which, when conceived independ- ently, would have the Indicative, and thus, a) when the leading sentence has a Principal tense, the Indicative must be used (§ 521): uiri jioi, riva yvwfxriv £X£f Cj t^^l ^^? what opinion you have (direct : Tiva yvwiurjv aX^ig) [Lat. die mihi, quam sententiar)i habeas'] ; b) when the leading sentence has an Historical tense the Indicative inay be used (§ 522) : uirov, rivTiva yv6(5og kevoq ^v), com- pare § 523. b) as a substitute for the Subjunctive (§ 527, b), i. e., when an Historical tense occurs in the leading sentence, in case the Dependent sentence, if conceived independent- ly, ought to have the Subjunctive : tjSouXtuo^nv, niog ere airo^pairiv (direct : jrwg at airo^pto) [Lat. delibero^am, quo §530. MOODS IN SENTENCES OF PURPOSE. . 291 modo te effugerem'],! was reflecting Jiow I should escape you. In the second case the Optative is to be translated by should. Obs. — Which of the two meanings belongs to the Optative is gen- erally perceived from the connection quite as easily as in the Latin nesciebat quid faceret^ Tie Tcnew not what he did or what he should do. § 529. The Optative as a substitute for the Indicative is found also without a Conjunctioji in the continuation of a direct speech : tXe^ov TToXAoi, oTi iravTOQ d^ia Xeyei (§ 526, 5), %€i/ia;j/ yap e'ltj kuI oiKude cltto- •TrXHv ov dwoTuv etr], many said that he says what is worthy of the ut- most regard^ for that it was winter, and that it was impossible to sail home. On the Infinitive in assertions, § 560. On the Participle in asser- tions, § 593. Mixed examples : TTEiVf OTI TO lulv bCjjia T^Ovri^eTat (§ 291), /; 0£ ^I'X'? avawTacra (§ 316, 5) oix{](TeTaL aOavaTog kol ayrfpwQf Pythag07'as the Sainian was the first among the Greeks who ventiored to maintain that the hody will he dead^ hut the soul, flying u/pward,will depart immortal and ever young ; Oe/uncrTo- kXtj^ viog tTi (jjv tXEysVf wg Kadev^eiv avTov oi/k €(j>)7 to tov MtXTia^ov TpoTratoVf Themistocles, when still young, used to say that the trophy of Miltiades would not let^im sleep ; ^AiropCjjTov (§ 214:fOhs. 1) irpioTov fivr]iossederit), num heatus sit f Ohs. — In Homer the Protasis of such a period also sometimes has Ks-v or dv : €1 TovToi Ks XdjSoifiev, dpoiixeOd Kev kXsoq iaQXov, if ice should get these two, we should get glorious fame. The Attic writers very rarely use dv in the Protasis. § 547. Since h with the Optative intimates that a thing is merely possible, it expresses in reference to the past what possibly might have been, i. e., a repeated case (com- pare § 494, Ohs. 1) ; the Apodosis then usually has the In- dicative : £1 TTOU t^tXauvod 'Acrrua'/Tjc, \^ 'iinrov \pvao\aXivov Trepiriye tov Kvpov, if ever Astyages rode out (might ride out), he tooh Cyrus %cith him on a horse loith a golden hridle. % 548. u with the Optative in the oratio ohliqua takes the placCj accord]^ to § 523, of u with the Ind. (1), or N 2 298 MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. § 549. tdv with the Subjunctive (3), when a Hypothetical sen- tence depends, on a Historical tense : y'^n Kvpog, on u tl iua-)^r]g ttots ^f^crof, f/c rwv (piXtov avrt^ TTapaaTaraq XrjTrriov eir), Cyrus hiew that, if ever any hattle should he necessary, he would have to take his supporters from his own friends. In direct language, Cyrus would say, ti]v ttote deijarj or a TTorc ^eyjcTEL — XrjTTTiov Igti. If, in its relation to the time of the governing verb, the condition lies in the Future, the Future Optative is used. We seldom, in this case, find lav with the Subjunctive. The following general remarks also are to be observed in regard to Conditional sentences. § 549. 1. The two members of a Hypothetical Period are not so dependent on each other as that the one necessarily requires a special form in the other. A Protasis of one form niay, on the contrary, be joined with the Apodosis of another form. It occurs very frequently that a Protasis is in the first or third form, and the Apodosis in the fourth, in order to represent the Assertion which it contains as merely possible : u rouro Xtysig, afiapTavoig av,if you mean this, you would he in error; lav lOeXriarjTe irpaTTtiv a^itjQ vjjlC)v avTMVyiaijjQ av fiaya ri KTrjaaKrOe ayaOov, if you should he disposed to act in a riianner icorthy of yourselves, you would perhaps gain great good. The connection of a Protasis of the second form with an Apodosis of the fourth is rare ; Hom. K.ai vv kev tvO' clttoXoito avaE, avdpMv Al- vdaQf tl lULYj ap o^u vorj(7£ Atoc Ovyarrjp 'A^joo^trrj, and now assuredly ^neas, rider of men, would there have perished, if Zeus^s daughter Aphrodite had not Jcept a sharp look- out. § 550. 2. A Hypothetical Period may partly or entirely be inserted in anvother sentence. The most peculiar in this respect are sentences expressing a purpose, when connected with Conditional sentences: ix yap M, avicrravro /cat liropsvovTO, after having -eaten something, they rose and proceeded ; 'O '^wKparr^g Tovg (Tvvovrag IttoUi^v jliovov ottote vtto tCjv avOpwTTtJV opiiwro, a7ri\t- jpmied. Obs. — In Homer such Infinitives are particularly frequent : ^kya kuI k(jK 6p9CJg oletrQe, if you think the Chalcidians and Megarians will save Greece, hit you escape f?'om trouble, you are mistaken. § 570. 4. Predicative qualifications referring to the Prin- cipal Sicbject are in the^ Nominative : 6 'AXi^av^pog £0a- cTKEv alvat Aibg vlog, Alexander dicebat se esse Jovisfilium' fyw ovK bfxo\oyr\(JU) aKXrjTog rjKHV, a\X virb o-ou K^KXrifjiivog, I will not acknowledge that I am come uninvited^ hut i?i- vited hy you j oi SoKouvrtc o"o0ot uvai, they who seem to he wise. Ohs. — From the Predicate, Ikwv, joining the freer Infinitive, Civai (§ 564), arises the combination c/cwv tlvai : tovto Ikwv dvai ov TToiTjaw, this (if I am) to he of free will I will not do. § 571. 5. In m#ny cases a personal instead of an im- personal form of expression is used in Greek, the Subject of the Infinitive being made the Subject of the leading sentence ; so, instead of the English " it was announced that Cyrus had conquered" {riyyiXOr) rov Kupov viKriaai), we have, 6 KvpoQ riyyiXOrj viKriaaiy Cyrus was announced to have conquered. This form of expression occurs not only — as in Latin with dicitiir, videtur — with coku, toiKs, it seems; XiyErai [dicitur, traditurl ; ayyiXX^Tai,it is an- nounced; ofioXoydrai, it is agreed, but also with av/jLJ^ai- vHyit happens, siR^ with several adjectives with ufii, as: ^iKaioQ,just ; iTTiTYi^eiog, liriKaipLOQ, fitting ; lTri^o^oq,proh- ahle ; avayKoiog, necessary ; avrog fioi Sokw IvOade Kara- fitvHVyit appears to me that I myself shall remain here; ZiKaioq kx ayuv avOpwirovg, it is just that you should lead m,en (you are justified in leading men); Wi^o^oi elm to avTo ireicrecTOai, it is to he expected that they will suffer the same; Poet. TrpiTrojv €«^uc irpo riovde (jtwvtXvyit hecomes you to speak in their presence. The personal construction is explained, like that of the Accusative with the Infinitive (§ 567), by prolepsis (§ 519, 5, Ohs. 2). For rjyyiXOr) oti 6 Kvpog hiKr]u)v Eivai, I Came to one of those who seem to he wisej iX^yov toXq doKOvcn o-o0o7c tivai, I said to those, etc. ; Kvpov iZiovTO wg TrpoOvjuoTaTOV y^vicrOai, they begged Cyrus to he as ready as jpossihle / iravrX ap- XovTi irpogmu (ppovifxij^ eivat, it hecomes every ruler to he judicious. Still the Predicate is often in the Accusative ^itvfKpepH avrolg efore is judged of in accordance icith its final remit. On the peculiar use of the Fut. Part, with the Article, § 500. ' B) Thew Ajpj)ositive Use. § 579. The Participle serves to ascribe to a substantive a merely transient quality or activity. In this case the Participle is a shorter and less definite mode of expression for what is otherwise expressed by subordinate clauses with conjunctions of the most different kinds (compare § 583, Ohs.). A Participle used in this way is : § 580. 1. Temporal, with the distinctions of time mentioned in Chap. XX. (esp. § 496) : TTpogexeTE tovtoiq avayiyvwGKOfiivoiQ tov vovv, give attention to this while heing read ; Hom. a>c apa ^wv^cac a7r€/3r]cr£To=£7r£i wc t^wvTjtxf, after having thus sjpohen he went awcty. Observe especially tx^v and tpipwv in descrip- tions, which may frequently be translated by the English with : rag vavg airicTreiXav exovra 'AXfctSav, they sent away Alcidas with (having) the ships; xpwfx^voq/ui a similar sense : TroXXp re x^y xpMfi^vog, with (using) much skill. So, also, apxpfxEvoq, at first / rt Xtvrwv, at last / ciaXnrwv Xjoovov, after a time; ev lioihiv^fortunatety; koXCjq woiiov, justly. The Participle wv can not be omitted when heing is to be ascribed to a substantive : 'AXic^jSmSr^C '^'^^ '''"^c <^v eOavfiaZero, while yet a hoy (Lat., merely ^'W^t') Alcihiades was admired (§ 428, Ohs.). § 581. 2. Causal and final, where the Participle is to be resolved by since, hy or hy § 583. THE PARTICIPLES. 315 the fact that, when referring to the present or past, and by that, in order that, when referring to the future : oi»/c tanv a^iKOVVTU SvvajuLiv J5ef3aiav KTrjaaaOaifJirm power is not to be gained hy acting unjustly f' tov a^iKovvra irapa rovg ^LKacTTcig ayeiv Sat ^iktjv dcjcrovTa, he who acts unjustly ought to he brought hef ore the judges in order that he may suffer punishment. § 582. 3. Concessive, a somewhat rarer use : to vSwp evojvoTarov apiarov 6v, water is the cheapest though it is the dest/ vfieXg {xpoptofievot to. TreTrpaynsva Kal dvQxspaivovreg iiyere rriv eiprjvTjv b/iwc, tJimigh suspicious of what had been done, and indignant, you still maintained tlie peace. §,583. 4. Hypothetical, a very frequent use, where the Participle is to be resolved by if, and corresponds to one of the forms of the Hypo- thetical P^rotaseis mentioned in § 534, etc. : tovq (l>i\ovg evEpyerovvTag kol rovg e\9povg dwyicTErrOa KoXaZeiv , if yotl benefit your friends you will be able also to punish your enemies {lav) ; also with the article : 6 p^] ^apiig avOpiowog ov TTaidevsTaiy a person is not educated if he has not been beaten. Such a Participle with pi] may often be translated by without : ovk eanv ap^uv prj ^i^ovra picrOov, a man can not rule without giving pay. Obs. — With the varied use of the Appositive Participles, it must not be overlooked that such a Participle of itself does not clear- ly express any of the meanings developed in §§ 580-583, but that we make use of the one or the other turn in translating only in order to express in a more precise way what is simply suggested by the Participle. Hence there are many transitions between these meanings, especially between the Temporal and Causal, but also between the Temporal and Hypothetical mean- ings, just as in Latin sentences introduced by quum : Trdvra ravTa< avvidovTag uTravTag (vpdg) del iSorjOeiv, it becomes every one of you, when you have considered all these things, to render help; vopi^oj dfieivov av vfidg irtpi wv vvv tpCJ KpXvai, fxiicpd ru>v TrpoTspSv ttote pr\Q'tvTiov fivrffiovEvfravrag, I think you would better judge about what I am now going to say, when you remember a little what was said before. 316 THE PARTICIPLES. § 584. C) The Participle with an Absolute Case. § 584. The Participle with a noun or pronoun in the Absolute Genitive (§ 428) or Accusative serves to point out the circumstances mentioned in §§ 579-583. The noun or pronoun to which the Par- ticiple refers may be regarded as its subject^ since from it jDroceeds the action expressed by the Participle. This construction, therefore, may be resolved by a separate clause, beginning with a conjunction, in which the word in the Genitive or Accusative must appear in the Nominative : rovnov dvayiyvoxjKo^ikvtjjv tov vovv TrpoQEx^Ts, attend while this is heing read (compare § 580). % 1. The Absolute Genitive (compare § 428), for which may be substituted clauses with temporal, causal, concessive, or hypothetical conjunctions : Df/oticXtouc 1770U- fitvcrv iroXXa Koi KaXa tpja airedei^avTO 01 ^AOrjvaioiy as long as Pericles led them {Pericle duce), the Athenians pro- duced 'many and splendid works ; vavfxaxiag jEvojuivr^g TiTTapag Tpiripeig Xa/i/3av£t TopytJirag, navali pngna facta Gorgopas quattuor triremes capit ; oXrjg rrig iroXeixig Iv Toig TToXeimiKoTg Kiv^vvoig iTTLTpeTrofxivrig r^i aTpaTYiyt[), imsyaXa ra T ayaOa KaropOovvTog avrov, kol to. kuko. ^la/uLapravovrog eiKog yeviaOai, as the whole state i7i the dangers of war is committed to the care of the general, it is natural both that great good should happen when he is successful, and great evil when he fails. Poet, yivoir av nav Oeov TE\vh)fiivov,^ all may be done if a God contrives it {u r^xvioTo). § 585. The Absolute Genitive differs from the corresponding Latin construction of the Ablative Absolute in the following points : a) The subject of the Participle is more frequently omitted in Greek when it is either easily understood from what precedes, or from the meaning of the verb, or when it remains indefinite (compare § 361, 3, Obs. 2) : Trpo'iovTiov, as {they) went forward; vovtoq^ when he (Zeus) rains; i^ayyfXQkvTiov^ when it had been announced. . &) On the necessity of the Participle of Civai — aov TraiSbg uvtoq [Lat. tepiiero], see §§ 580, 482, Obs. An exception occurs in the case of the adjectives UiIjv and clkijjv^ which very much resemble Participles : kfiov Ikovtoq, with my will; Ifiov ukovtoq, me invito. The Poets take other licenses. c) As the Greeks have two active Participles to express a past ac- tion, they use the Absolute Genitive of a Passive Participle less fre- § 587. THE PARTICIPLES. ,317 quently than the Romans do their Absolute Ablative : 6 Kvpog, tov KpoXaov viKTjffagj KaTearpsxparo tovq Avdovg, Cyrus, Crceso victo, Lydos Slbi aubjecit. d) The Absolute Genitive is employed even where the subject of the Participle is mentioned also in the leading sentence : tuvt uttov- TOQ avTov t^o^e Ti Xkyeiv t(^ 'Karvdyu, after thus speahing he seemed to Astyages to say something (of importance). [Lat. ita locutus — visus est] § 586. 2. The Absolute Accusative is usual in the case of some impersonal verbs, especially ^iov,it being a duty; t^ov, 7rap6v,it being allowed, fea- sible ; TrpogriKovyit being befitting/ d6^av,it having been decided / ovdtlg lE,bv dp{]vr)v ayuv iroX^jjiOv aiprjaerai, no one, being allowed to be at peace, will choose war ; iroX- XaKig vfXiv l^ov TrXcovffcrrjo-at ovk r}9e\{](Tar£f though it was often easy for you to gain 7nore,you were unwilling ; ol ^vpaKOiKTiOL Kpavyy ovk oXiyy i\pCovTO, a^vvarov 6v iv vvktl aWtt) T(jt) (TTiimrivaif the Syracusans raised no small shout, it being impossible to 'malce a signal during the night by any thing else. D) Supplements to Participles. § 587. For the sake of greater clearness, certain particles are added to Appositive Participles, as well as to Participles joined with an absolute case ; they give more distinct prominence to the idea expressed by the Participle. Such Supplements to Participles are : 1. (ifia, at the same time, denoting contemporaneousness : ot "EXKrjves tjxdxovTo tifia -rropzvojxBvoi, tlie Hellenes fought while marching. 2. fiera^v, 'between, amidst, with pretty nearly the same meaning : iir'tax^ fis Xkyovra fiera^v, he checked me in the midst of my speech. 3. avTiKa and (.vQvq, to express immediate succession : r^ ^e^iy Kkpq, ev9vg dirolitfirjKoTi tTreKeivro, they pressed upon the right wing immediately aftei' its landing. 4. TOTS, fiTa (Kg,Ta), tireiTa, o'vTiog, are added to the principal verb to indicate that the action of the Participle was past before, and take up the substance of it with various accessory ideas: KaToXnrcjv ^pov- pav oi5rwg Itt oikou dvex(opr}(7ev, after Imving left a garrison, he thu^ went 318 THE PARTICIPLES. § 588. away home;. Poet, /i?) vvv (pvyovreg eJO' aXwixev vaTspov, lest though now escaping we should afterward be caught. 5. KaiTTEp (more rarely kuL alone), with a Participle, to be translated though, renders prominent tlie concessive meaning : KuiTrep ovtoj co^dg wv (SeXtiiov av yevoio, though SO wise, you might perhaps become hetter; Homer often separates Kui from Trep : ol dk koI dxvvfievoi Trep Itt' avriii r'lSi) ykXaaaav, and though vexed they heartily laughed at him ; o/jlojq, in the same sense though or yet, ia used with the principal verb : Herod. vGTEpov dxiKoixevoi Trjg (Tvn(3o\r]C IfiEipovro ofiujg GefjaaaOai Tovg Mrjdovg, though they did not come till after the engagerrient, yet they desired to see the Medes. 6. are, with a Participle (like olov, ola crf), answers to the English in as far as, since, and brings into prominence its causal meaning : KUTsSapOe irdvv ttoXv are ^uKpwv twv vvktwv ovaujv, he slept a great while since the nights were long. [Compare Lat. quippe quum, quippe qui.] § 588. 7. tog and ibgirsp added to a Participle suggest that what is expressed in the participle is subjective, i. e., is the opinion, the conception, the view of the principal subject. Both particles are joined to the Appositive Par- ticiple as well as to a Participle connected with an abso- lute case, either the absolute Genitive or the absolute Ac- cusative. The latter case in this connection is far more extensively used than without those particles (§ 586). If the opinion expressed in the Participial construction is to be characterized af once as false, tjg and wgirEp may be translated by as if: Sediaai tov OavaTov wg bv tl^oreg on fiiyiGTov TLJv kukCjv i(TTiv, they fear death as if they well Icnew that it was the greatest of evils ; but by in the be- lief that, since, in the feeling that, etc., if the correctness of the opinion is to be left undecided : i7/xac iravTig t/SXtV- ofXBv TTpog avTov cjg avriKa jiaXa aKOvaroiuEvoi QavfiacTiovg TLvag A070UC, we all looked at him, expecting immediately to hear some wonderful statements j Poet. t^eaTi (jxvvhv wg Ijiiov /uovrjc niXag, you may speak out since (in the con- viction that) / alone am near ; Xiyei wg SidaKTOv ovarrig rrig apBTrig, he speaks thinking that virtue is capable of being taught f' cnrefiXixljaTE irpog aXXrjXovg wg avTog filv f/caoroc ov TTOir]x^t aTroTrTafievog, he was gone flying away, Obs. — Even the verb dfil may be joined with a Participle : tf tovto ovK tffTi yiyvSixevov Trap r/fuv ; is this not happening (usual) among us? A Participle is necessarily so used with f/^t to complete certain verbal forms (compare §§ 287, 291), especially the Par- ticiple of the Perfect or Aorist with cZ/ti instead of the Future Perfect : dedcoKujQ or Sovg tau = dederis. § 591. 2. Verbs of perceiving, as : opau), I see {Trepiopaio, I overlook, endure) ; afcouo), / hear ; ol^a, I know ; fiavOavu), I learn ; jiyvcjaKO), I get to know ; alaQavofim, I perceive ; tvpi, vje shall trust the commander %ohoin Cyrus gives (us) {rovTi^ ov). Obs. — Attraction very seldom takes place with other cases : wv iv- Tvyxavbt) fidXKTTa dyafiai ckj i. €., tovtujv olf, I admire you most of all I meet. § 599. All clauses subordinate to a Relative Sentence, so far as they consist of words referring to the Relative, and are capable of inflexion, must likewise be modified in the Attraction : olg ovaiv vfx^Tipoig f'x^*' rovroig iravra raX- \a a(T(l)a\i^g KiKrrjrai, i. e,^ a ovra vfiirepa t'x^^j rovroig, he keeps all the rest in safety hy means of what he has of yours, § 600. oToe, and sometimes o(toq and jjXikoc, have quite a peculiar attraction ; viz., dvai is often omitted wlien it would stand with olog in the nominative, and the latter is put in the same case as its ante- cedent : oV<^ ye iiiol TTavTctTramv drropop tovto, i. ^., togovti^ olog kyu) el/xi, that is quite impossible to such a inan as lam. Sometimes the article is prefixed at the same time : toXq o'loig ijjuv, to such as we. By the same ellipsis ogngovv acquires the fixed meaning, whoever, i. e., any whatever : ovk tan diKaiov dvdpbg (SKd-rrTuv ovrivovv dvOpwTTujv, it is not a just 'man's nature to injure any person whatever (i. e., any one, who- §603. PECULIARITIES OF RELATIVE SENTENCES. 325 ever he may be). [Compare Lat. cuicunque Twmini nocere.] So ogng ^ovXh means the same as ovtoq ov iSovXei, like quivis. § 601. Other Relative expressions, all involving either Shortening or Attractior^ are : av0' ojv, hecause, i. e.^ avrX tovtljv a, or avrt tovtiov otl : av ev tTTOirjcFag avO' wv tiraO^Qj you did good because, you received good (for that which you received). t0' to, £(^' wra (Herod, lin tovti,^, lir' (orf),/6»7' the pur- pose of^ on condition that, i. e., hn tovtoj logre, often with the Infinitive : ol rpiaKOVTa ypiOrjaav 1^' tiyTe avyy paxpai v6ij.ovg, the thirty were chosen J^br the purpose of drawing up laws. f ? ov, cKf)' ovf ex quo, since, i. e., since the time that. On Iv (J, uq o, o.yjii ov, § ^o^, oloc, more complete roiovrog mog, with the Infinitive, of the hind that, of the kind to, and ocogr^, with the Infinitive, able, possible : -ovk riv lopa ola apduv to Tre^iov, it was not the season to water the field j ovx oIoits riaav fior^Oricrai, they were not able to render help (compare § 562). oo-ov, for roaovro o in general is used in all those dependent sentences which do not express a negative purpose or a condition : y^eiv, on ov pa^iov e'/r?, / /meiv it was not easy / a ovk iare roitg iral^ag ttoihv, ravra avToX Troieire, what you do not allow your children to do'fotc do your- selves. § G16. THE NEGATIVES. 331 Obs. 1. — In indirect questions ov as well as }ir] may be used with f I in the sense of whether : aKOTruJixev, \^ irpkirn ri ov, let us consider whether it is becoming or not ; Treipdaofiai fiaOelv, ei d\r]9eg fj ^f], I icill try to Imrn whether it is true or not. Obs. 2.^In such Relative Sentences as contain quite a general idea, Hi] may be used : a fiij oUa, ovde oloixai eldevai, what I do not hnow, I do not think I Tcnow. § 616. 5. fill in. general is used in all those dependent sentences in which a negative jpurjpose or a co')idition is expressed ; hence fxi\ is the negative in sentences denot- ing intention or jpui^jpose (§ 530), in those indirect Inter- rogative and Relative sentences where a purpose of hin- dering is implied, in all the Protaseis of Hypothetical Periods (^§ 534, etc.), and lastly in Hypothetical Rela- tive (§ 554) clauses, as well as in Hypothetical Temporal clauses (§§ 66Q, 557): lav rig Kafiri, napaKoXtig larpov, oTTwg fxri aTToOavT), when any one is ill., you send for a physician., that he may not die j •\\jy\<^iaaa^^ Toiavra tS wv fuLTidiTTOTe vfXLv fiiTafiAnaHy vote for such things as will never cause yoio to repent \ea quorum numquam vos poeniteat\ ; opa, ottwc im iaa(jQe tov iroXeinov ixri (pof3r]9evT£Q rb avriKa deivov, determine upon the war without fear- ing the immediate danger. B) Several Negatives comhined. % 619. 1. A Negative is not neutralized by a subsequent compound Negative of the same kind, but only continued. In translating, the Negative is employed only o,7ice in En- § 621. THE NEGATIVES. 333 glish, and the place of the other Negative is supplied by an indefinite : Poet, ouk Itcmv ov^lv Kptlaaov rj voiaoi woXei, there is not any thing hetter for a state than lavjs ; ov^elg TTWTTorf "EwKparovg ov^lv acrfjSfC ov^e avoaiov ovte irpar- TovTog ti^Ev, ovre Xiyovrog 7]Kov(Tev, no one ever either saw Socrates doing or heard him saying any tiding i^n^ious or unholy. Obs. — A Negative is neutralized by a subsequent simple Negative of the same kind : ovSdg dvQpwTrujv dSiKu/v riciv ovk dTro^wo-ei, no one wTio does wrong will not {I. e., every one will) pay the penalty. § 620. 2. ov followed by /z// with the Subjunctive or Fu- ture Indicative is an emvhatio negative. This mode of speaking is to be explained by the idea of fear being sup- plied after ov (compare § 616,6^^^.3): ov jurj noiriaw, abcTut the same as ov ^ojSrjrtov ju?) iroiriaii), there is no fear that I shall do it, i. e., I shall certainly not do it : ov'Bhq firjiroTs evprjcFEi to kut sfxl ov^ev lX\H(l)9iv, no one will ever find that any thing, as far as defends on me, is neg- lected j ov /JLYITTOTE t^apvoQ yivtojuai, I shall certainly never deny. § 621. 3. jut) , followed by ov is used in very different ways : a) After verbs o^i fearing, julyj ov corresponds to the Lat. ne no7i or ut, and is to be translated by that no^ ^i^oiKa, juri ov OtfxiTov y, vereor, ne non justurn sit, I fear that it is not just (compare § 616, Ohs. 3); also without a governing verb, jurj ov Oepirov y, if it be but not not right, i. e., if it be only not wrong (compare § 512, and § 616, Ohs. 3); Hom. pi\ vv roi ov yjia[G\xy aK.r]Trrpov kcli aTkiipia 0£Oto, the god^s staff and garland will surely not help you. J) In indirect questions where p.i} would mean if per- haps (§ 610), [IT] ov means ^yor whether perhaps not : aOpu lj,ri ov TovTo y to ayaOov, look- whether perhaps this is not the good. Obs. — In the cases adduced under a and 5, fir) is a Negative Con- junction, and ov the Negative to a special word. 334 THE NEGATIVES. § 622. c) fjLTi oil is used with the Infinitive after Negative ex- pressions, in the sense of so as not, or not to : ov^tig ologTs (iWwg Xijijjv fJLi) ov KarayiXaarTog uvai, 710 one SJ>eaJcing otherwise is able not to he ridiculous. d) jurj ov is farther used with the Infinitive after nega- tive verbs, or questions containing verbs of hindering, for- bidding, denying, refusing (§ 617, Ohs. 3). The Infinitive in this case is often preceded by the Article. In English the negative is not expressed : ov KwXvoiueOa /bLrj ov fiaOaiv, we are not hindered from learning ^ ixr\ irapijg to ^f/ ov ^paaaiydo not omit saying it / riva out airapvyicrtcrOai /arj ovxi tTriaraaOaL to. diKaia ; who do yoih think will deny at all understanding what is just? Obs. — ov is here only a repetition of the Negative contained in the principal sentence. C) 8o7ne Negative Phrases. § 622. 1. ovUv, ixn^iv, and ovti, fiini, nothing, are often used as free Accusatives, like the Latin nihil, meaning not, not at all / compare § 404, Ohs. • 2. ouTTw, luyjTTd), not yet, are to be carefully distinguished from ovKETtj fxrjKhi, no longer : outtw ireiroirjKa, 7%ondum feci^ ovKtTL iroiqaix), 7%on amjplius faciam. 3. ovy^ri stands for ou Xtyw on, I do not say that, not . to onention ; /cm ovx on 6 Kpinov ev vrrvxici w, aWa kqX ol 0fXot avTov, and not to ^mention {i. e., not only) Crito was quiet, hut his friends also were. 4. pi) on for pi) tiTTd) on (pi) oirayg) means do^i^t suppose, nedum, by which the mention of something is declined as unnecessary, and hence may sometimes be translated in Negative sentences by not only not : pi) on Oeog, aXXa KOL avOpMTTOi ov (piXovm Toifg aincrTOvvTag, dorH suppose that only God, hut men also do not love the faithless [non homines infidos amant ; nedum dens']. In like manner oux oirijjg, properly not that, donH suppose, may frequent- - 0^ T!f V • § 624. a. THE PARTICLES. 335 ly be rendered in connection with Negatives by not only not. 5. juLovov ov, jLLovov ovxh ouly not, is equivalent to aU most, nearly; oorov ov, temporal [tantum. noji], nearly, almost : KarayeXa vtt' avdpiov ovg av fxovov ov TrpogKVveig, you are ridiculed hy men whom you almost worship. 6. o\) fxrjv or ov fxivroi aWa, however, notwithstanding, is to be explained by an ellipsis: 6 iWoc iiiKpov Ikuvov \^iTpayj]Kia^v ' ov fiiiv (viz., l^iTpax<]\i(Tiv) aWa lirifiuvw 6 Kvpogy the horse nearly threw him off, {did) not, however, hut Cyrus Icejpt his seat. On ovTt, fXijTs, ov^e, /nrj^i, § 625. Chap. XXVIL— The Particles. § 623. Particles are also indeclinable words which serve partly to connect sentences, partly to give emphasis to particular parts of a sentence, and to enliven language. The Particles which serve to connect sentences are called Conjunctions ; those which give prominence to particular parts of a sentence, or impart animation by making entire sentences prominent, are called eniphatic particles. In regard to position, they are either prepositive, i. e., take the first place in a sentence, or postpositive, i. e., al- ways stand after at least one other word in a sentence. Obs. — The Conjunctions are divided into various classes according to their meaning. Several Conjunctions, however, belong equal- ly to different classes. They will be arranged according to their original or primitive signification. A) Conjunctions. Preliminary Kemark. § 624. a. The Conjunctions are here enumerated without regard to the formal relation of sentences to one another (§ 519). But 336 THE PARTICLES. § 624. 1. Co-ordination is implied in all Copulative and Dis- junctive Conjunctions, the Adversative Conjunctions with the exception of ojutjQf which is used principally in the Apodosis, among the Causal Conjunctions yap, and all Illa- tive Conjunctions except logre ; 2. Subordination is implied in all the rest. Ods. — Much more rarely than in modern languages, more rarely also than in Latin, is one word or one sentence added to another in Greek without some Conjunction. The Asyndeton (davv^ETov, want of connection) takes place more frequently only in an Epex- egesis (s7re?]7yr/(ng), i. e., a subsequent explanatory addition to some- thing already alluded to in the previous sentence : elfii ng yeXolog larpoQ ' iojusvog /xEiZov to vofftjfia ttoiw, / am an odd physician ; Tyy curing the disease I make it worse. Wherever the Asyndeton oc- curs in other cases, the speaker generally intends to produce a special effect by it. I. Cojpulative Conjunctions. § 624. h. 1. The two Copulative Conjunctions are »cat, which in general corresponds to the Latin et^ and the post- positive, enclitic ri, which in general corresponds to the Latin que. The language of poetry has besides i^St and 'tSf , with the meaning and [compare atgue\, 2. The Greeks, like the Romans, are fond of expressing the idea of addition in two connected parts of a sentence, either by Kai — Kai or rt — jcat, or rk — rk : koli Kara yfjv koX Kara OaXacrcrav, both hy land and by water / Hom. ^ krpu^ai r£ Koi aXXoL evKvri]Ln^eg ^Axaioi, ye AtridcB as well as ye other well-greaved Achmans ; Hom. mil yap tol epig re (j)i\ri TToXefioL re ficixat n^^for strife is always jpleasant to you, and wars and battles. We may farther add the Epic rifikv — r]^k, as well — as also. Obs. — In single instances we also find rk — ^£, where the second member is made more prominent by contrast. 3. Kai has, moreover, the meaning also : Hom. Trajo' tfjioiye »cai aXXof, oi K£ fXB Tiiinaovai, with me are also others^ who will honor me. § 625. THE PARTICLES. 337 In this sense, also, Km is frequently used in both the connected parts of a sentence : koI rj/buv ravra ^oku air^p KCLL P^aaiku, we also ajpjprove the same thing as the Jcing {does also). The meaning also by intensification becomes even : kol Xiav, even verij much / and in the opposite case even hut : kol (5paxvv xpovov, eve?i lut a short ti?ne. koi ^i answers to the English and also : ^iKaiov kol irpiirov ^l cLfia, just and at the smne time also hecoming. After words of resemblance or likeness Kai means as : oiuLoiwg Kai, ceque ac. 4. aXXwg re Kai properly means " both in other respects, and also ;" it serves to give prominence to the subsequent word or words, and may be translated by especially: x«X£7rov tan dia(5aivHv rdv Trorafiov dXXojQ re kuI TroXefiiujv 7roXKu>v ejyvg ovtmv^ it is difficult to cross the river^ especially as many of the enemy are near. kuI Srj Kai is used to make the last part of a series emphatic : Herod. Kpoiaov jiamXEvovroQ din- KvkovTai kg 'EdpSiQ dXXoi re oi ttcivteq Ik Ttjg 'EXXddog ao(pi(TTai^ Kai di^ Kai SoXwv, during the reign of Crcesus there came from Hellas doth all the other wise men and especially Solon [Lat. cum — tum\ 5. In the Epic Dialect re is frequently employed to indicate the agreement not only of separate parts of a sentence, but of whole sen- tences, often, too, in connection with other Particles, such as Kai, /^ev, ^g, aWo^and with relatives (ogT^, oaogrE). In these cases re must gen- erally tlpleft untranslated or rendered by an unaccented also : Horn. og K€ QioTg tTrnrsiOijTai fidXa r tKXvov avTov, wlwever oheys the gods they greatly listen to him also. m Obs. — The re in we«, olocre, which occurs also in prose, is of the same origin. 6. The rising climax^is also expressed by ov fiovov — aXXa Kai, not only — hut also. On 6i>x ort, firi otl, ov\ oirwg, see § 622. § 625. 1. The* Particles ov^i, fxtj^i and ours, jui^rg, serve to form a negative series. Two different meanings belong to ouSt and luri^if viz. : a) nor either, and not / in this sense they are used to connect a single member of a sentence "v^lh a preceding one negatively : Hom. jS/ow/irjc ov\ a-KT^ai ovde iroTriTog, you touch not meat nor drinJc either / Trpog gov ovS' Ijjlov (l)pac means in order that : wg firj navTeg o\(i)VTai, in order that all may not perish. Compare § 530, etc. g) On wg expressing a wish (Lat. utinami), see § 514. § 632. 2. wgirep, as, is only a strengthenecl'^wc (compare § 641, 3), and is used only in a comparative sense. 3. oirwg, how, that, in order that, is principally used as a final Conjunction, and may then B42 THE PARTICLES. § 633. be translated by that^ or in order that^ compare § 530, etc. On ovx oTTwc, § 622, 4. 4. a)OT£, as, so that, bas rarely tbe comparative meaning as, generally tbe con- secutive so that, when it is followed either by an Infinitive or a finite verb. Compare § 5^5. 5. Hom. ^i5rc, as, just as,iike, only in comparisons. § 633. V. Declarative Conjunctions, 1. OTL, that, because [Lat. quod^, is originally nothing but the Neuter of the pronoun oqtlq, 6 ri, on the distinction of which from on, compare § 214, Obs. 2. Like the Latin quod, on has two principal mean- ings, the declarative that and the causal because. a) on means that after verbs of saying and declaring (compare § 525) : 'HpaKXeiTog Xiyei, on iravra x^P^^ '^"^ ov^lv juiveif Ileraclitus says that every thing moves, and nothing is stationary. Hence the phrase S^Xov on (also written SrjXovori), it is clear that, manifestly. Obs. — Sometimes, also, a direct speech is introduced by on, so that the Conjunction is, as it were, a mere sign of quotation : ISrjXov r) ypacpf], on QEfiicrroKXrjg ^kw Trapd gs, the letter Stated (that) I The^ mistocles am come to you. b) because, that [Lat. quod^ : Hom. x^ojuevog, or api- arov ^Axaiiov ovSlv tncrag, angry that you have not hon- ored the best of the Achceans. The use of oti (or o ri) with a superlative deserves at- tention : on raxK^ra like mq raxK^ra, as quickly as possi- ble/ and on ju//, except, besides : ovk riv Kprivrj on fxrj juiia, there was no fountain except one,0 2. ojg, that, § 631, d. 3. gioTf, that, § 636, 2. 4. ovveKa, that, § 636, 3. § 635. THE PARTICLES. 343 yi. Temporal Conjunctions. § 634. (Respecting the Moods, see § 6oQ, etc.) 1. oTi, oiroTE, whe?i, as \_qtm?ido, cum] : orav, oTrorav, when^ if : r/v ttotc \p6voq, ore Otol /jlv ^aLvovTai OL TroXijULOi, when it was evening the enemy sud- denly appeared. 4. riiioQ, poet, when : Horn. ii]\iOQ d' 7]sXiog ji'taov ohpavbv afx^ilSefSTjKei, Kai Tore Si) xpycreta Trarijp iriTaive raXavra^ lolien (at the moment) the sun liad entered mid heaven, just then the father raised the golden scales. • § 635. 5. lird, (Tfter, when, as : linav, lirriv, lirav, lohen ; Hom. avrap liru Trocriog koX k^rjTvog l^- tpov fVro, hut when they had quenched the desire for food and drinh ; YJvpoq vTricTXsro av^pl licaorq^) ^(xxjelv Trivrs apyvpiov fxvaq, lirav elg BajivXiova t]K(i)(Tiv, Gyrus promised to give each man five silver mince when they should come to Bahylon. iizu frequently introduces a reason, and then is to be translated by hecause or for : Hom. aXXa TrWiaOe kol vfifiegf Ittel TrELOerrOai afiuvov, hut do you also ohey me, for it is hetter to ohey. 6. eTTEi^T], now since, since : liru^avy when, is liru strength- ened by §// (§ 642), and points more strongly to the reason y = tojg. 344 THE PARTICLES. § 636. assigned than eird : iTreidrj aveujxOri to ^Eo-juwr/jjotov, tig- riXdoiuLEv, now si7ice the prison was opened we entered. 7. EU)g, as long as, till [qioamdm, duin, done(i\ : twc £Tt kXirig, as long as there is still hope; TnpL^^ivoji^v iujg avoi- xOdrj TO ^E(Tiuiii)Ti]piov, we waited till the prison shoidd he opened, 8. iCJTS. 9. fJi^xP'-f ^XP'- (compare § 455 10. poet, ocjipa, as long as, till : Horn, o^pa fikv i]u)g r/v, as long as it was morning; Horn, ix^i kotov, o^pa TtXkaay^ he nurses wrath till hefuljills it. oM7/," Verbs with Genit., 421. " Capability, "QiQ,.,'SfQvhs, with Inf., 560, 1. Cardinal Num., 220. Case, 100— Use of, 392, etc.— Endings, 100 — Ace, 142; 153— in Comps., 3W, Obs. " Cause," in the Genit., 408, 7—422; 426 — Dat., 439— Part., 581. Challenge or Command — in the Subj unc, 509 — by ottws-, 553, Obs. Characteristic, 249. Circumflex, 21 ; 80 ; 83, etc. ; 87 a. Classes of Verbs in &>, 247- ^ 250; 320-327; of Verbs in * HI, 305-319. Collective Sing., 362. Common Gend., 127, 5 ; 140. " Community," expressed by Dat. 436. Comparative, 192, etc. — de- clens., 170, etc— irreg., 199 —Adv., 203— with Genit., 416 — Adj. and Verbs with Genit., 416, Obs. 3 ; 423. Compensation by lengthen- ing, 42 — for V, 49, Obs. 3 ; 147, 1 ; 233, 2— for vt, vO, vd, 50 ; 147, 1 ; 187— for a, 270. Completed Action in Verbs, 484; 435; 502-506. 354 ENGLISH INDEX. COMPOUNDS. Compounds, Divis. of Syll.,73 — Accent, 85; 131; 165; 183; 332 — Adj., 182, etc.; 189, 8 — Augm. in Comp. Verbs, 238, etc.— treated as simple Verbs, 402 — with Genitive, 424 — with Dat., 43T. Concessive Participle, 582. Conditional Sentences, 534, ■ 549— uegat., 616. Conju7ictions, 623, etc. Connecting Vowels, 233, 1, 2, 5 ; 262, etc. ; 275. Consonants, Divis. of, 30, etc., 44 — in dividing iSyll., 71, etc. Contraction, 36, etc.— in De- clens., 118; 122; 128; 130, etc.; 103, D. ; 166; 108 — Double, 167— Omitted, 85, D. 1; 165; 160, D. ; 288, D. 4 ; 243, D. ; 263, D.— of the Pres. Stem, 243, etc.— of Adv., 201— Contr. Syll. long, 75, Obs.— Accent, 87 ; 168; 881— Contr. Fut., 269 ; 262, etc. Co-ordination, 519, 1 a, 2. Coronis, 16 ; 05. Correlation, 519, 4 — Correl. Pron. 210 ; 218— Adv., 217, etc. Crasis, 10; 65 — Accent in. Dative, Perispome, 109— Oxy- toue, 188, 2— in Monosyll., 142 — in iv, 178, D. — Meaning, 429, etc. — withPrepos.,447,3— ofad- vant. and disadv., 431— of interest, 431, etc. — ethical, 483 — of community, 436, etc. — of instrument, 438, etc. — of measure, 440 — free, 441-443. "Declaration," Verbs of— with Ace. and Inf., 567 — with Inf, 500, 2 — with Part., 593 — with oi^, 617, Obs. 1— Sentences of, 525. . Decomposites, Augment in, 239. Defectives in Compar., 200. Defining Object, 400 c— Inf., 562. Demonstrative Article, 369— Pron., 212; 216; 475— fol- lows the predicate, 367 — Art. with, 389. Denominatives, 389. Dental Cons., 30— dissim. 40 — become a, 47 ; 07 — mutes dropped before a, 49 ; 147, 1; 149; 260— in Per f., 281 — Charact. in Verbs, 250, Obs — Fut., 260, 3. Deponents,4S2—PaiSS.,S2S, 2— Pass. Mean., 328, 4: 483,3. Derivative Ending in Com paratives, 357. Description expressed by the Imperf., 488. Desideratives, 353, Obs. 2. Determinative Comps., 359, 1 and Obs. (Comp. 300). Diceresis, 9 ; 22, Obs. Digamma, 3, D. ; 34, D. ; 85, D. 2 ; 63, D. ; 75, D. ; 160 237 ; 283, Obs. ; 360, Obs. Diminutives, 347 ; 104. Diphthongs, Pronunciation. 8— Origin, 26; 35, 2— be- fore Vowels, 35, Obs. ; 160 : 248, Obs.— without Angm., 235— spurious, 27. Disjunctive questions. (See Double question.) Dissimilation, 40. Distributives, 223. Doric Fut., 204. Doubling of Conson., 62 ; 34 Double questions, 611 — oi and M';, 615, Obs. 1. Dual represented by PI., 366, Effect and Consequence ex- pressed by Ace. and Inf., 567. Elision, 64— Accents, 88— be- fore Enclit, 96, 3. Enclitics, 92, etc.— retaining the Accent, 96. Endi7ig, 100 — changed in Comps. 855— of the IstDe clens., 134— of 2d,172. Enjoying,\erhs of, with Gen itive, 419 d. Epexegesis, 624 a, Obs. Ethical Dative, 433. Exclamations, 393 — in Ace. 399, Obs— in Genit., 427. Extent, exp. by Ace, 405. Fear and Anxiety, 538 ; 512 616, Obs. 3. Feeling, verbs of, with Ace. 899— with Dat., 439, Obs.— with Genitive, 422, Obs.— with Part., 592. Feminines, 103; 127; 188; 108. Fi7ml letters, 07, etc. — Syll. long — bef. vowels short, 75, D. 2— Contr. Accent, 87; 183. Future, 499, etc., 484 — Act. . with trans. Meaning, 329 — periphrastic, 501 — Fut. Perf., 505 — Ind. with /ce, 554, Obs. 2— Particip. with Art., 800. Gender, known by general rules, 101, etc.; 127 — by ending of Stem, 125 ; 137, INTEEROGATIVE. etc.— by Declens., 105 ; 122 —in A Declens., 122 — in O Declens., 127 — in Conson. Declens., 137, etc. Generic Article, 375. Genitive Perispome, 100 ; 118 — Oxytone,133, 2— Paroxy- toue, 181 — in Monosyll., 142 — represented by Oev and 0rv,178,D.; 118— Meaning, 407— with Prepos.,447, 2— with Subst.,408, etc.— with Adj. and Adv., 414, etc.— with Verbs, 417, etc.— free Genit., 425, etc. Gentile l>iames, 349; 350. Grave accent, 19, etc. ; 86. Gutturals, 30 — with a form f , 48 ; 260 — before n, become 7,47 — with t, become era-, 57— Charact. of Pres., 250 ; 251, D. Heteroclites, 174. Hiatus, 08 — apparent, 68, D. 4. Hypothetical Sent (See Con- ditional Sent.). Imperative, 228 — 1 Aor., 53 — 268,D.;518— iuCond.Sent., 545, Obs. 8— exp. by 2 Pers. Fut. with ov, 499, Obs. — supplied by Inf., 577. Imperfect,4SQ, etc. — in Cond. Sent., 548 — in Prot. and Apod., 538; 541. Inclination, 91, etc. Incomplete Action, 484, etc. Indefinite Subject, 361,3, Obs. 2— in Neut., 864. Indefinite Prououus,214,etc. ; 216— Adv., 92, 4. Indicative, &)! — in Depend. Sent., 620; 528— in depend., declar.,and interrog.Sent., 626— in Condit. Sent., 530, etc., 545 — in temp. Sent., 566— hypoth. Ind. in Cond. Sent., 637— in Sent, of pur- pose, 650. Indirect Object, 430 a. Individualizing Article, 371, etc. Infinitive Act., in ij.evai, ixev, 233, D. 3; 265, D. — in vai Aor. and Perf. Accent, 383, 1-^; 268, Obs. 1 — Use, 659 —with Art., 379— as Sub- ject, 563 ; 574, 1— Ace, 2— Gen., 8— Dat., 4— with ju'v, and ou, 017 — with nh ov, 621 c, d— for Imper., 677. " Injure," Verbs— with Ace, 896. Instrument, suffix, 844 — Da- tive of, 438 ; 674, 4. Interest or Advantage, Dat. of, 431, ete— Middle of,479. Interrogative Pron., 214 ; 216 ENGLISH INDEX. 355 IKREGULAB. — direct andindirect,475 6; 609— in depend. Sent., 525 — joined with Demonstr., 606, Obs. 1. Jz-rfif/M/Jar Nouns, 177 — Verbs, 320, Obs. Iterative form, 334, D., etc.— in Imperf. and Aor., 335, D. Judicial Proceediugs, Verbs of— with Genit., 422. Kinds of Verbs, 225, 2. Labials, 30 — before /x. 47 before o-, 48; 260 — verbal stem, 249. Lengthening, 40, etc. ; 147 ; 155 ; 165 ; 173, Obs. — in Pres.,24S— intheFut. 2; 261 — in Redupl., 275 (Com p., 273, D. ; 278)— of Vowels, 243, D. 3 ; 263, D. Liquids, 33— in divis. of Syll., Locative, 179. Long by Nature, 75. Manner, exp. by Dat, 441. Masculines,102; 137— distiug, from Fem., 113; 122; 134 —for Fem., 362, Obs. 2. Material, suffix, 352, 3, 4- Genit.,408, 3; 414,2; 418. Measure, in Dat., 440. Medice, 32. Metaplasm, 175. Metathesis, 59 ; with strong Aor., Act. and Mid., 257 D., 282, 285 ; with strong Aor. Pass., 295, D. Middle, 477, etc. — direct, 478 — indirect, 479 — Subject- ive, 480— Causative, 481 — Aor. with Mid. meaning, 255, 2 ; 271— Fut. with Act. meaning, 264 ; 266 ; 328, 1 — with Pass, meaning, 266. Modesty of Assertion, exp. in Opt., with uv, 517, Obs. 1. Jfomeritory Action, 484; 492- 498. Monosyllabic Stems, length- ened, 142 &— in \, V, p,Perf., 282— AccentofMon. words, 142— with Enclit., 94. Moods, 225, 4, Multiplicatives, 223. **Must" and "^^/lowW, "Verbs of, in Imperf., 490. JfM^es,31, etc.— Assimilation, 49, D, ; 52— before Liquids and Nasals, 78— Stems of Verbs, 248. Ka'ine in Genit., 408, 9 — of Animals, Gender, 140. •'iVawe,""Select,"etc.,Verb8 of, 361, 7, 10; 392; 403. PASSIVE. Narrative in Aor. Ind., 492. Nasals, 33— in divis. of Syll., 72,1. Necessity, expressed by Ver- bal Adj., 300. Negatives, 619, and Obs. Negative Pron. and Adv., 219. Neuters, 104 ; 139 — Dental Stems, 147 b; — Liquid Stems, 151 — Sigma Stems, 165— Marks of, 105, 3 ; 125 ; 136— Accent, 340, Obs. 4 — as Adv., 201 ; 203 ; 401 — Plu. with Sing. Verbs, 303 —Adj. as Predic, 366. Nominal Predicate, 361, 4, etc. Nominative Dual oxytone, 131,1— for Voc, 129; 393- meaning, 392. Nouns from Verbal Stems, 245. Numbers, 100, 1 ; 225, 1 — "two" in the PI., 305. Numerals, 220, Obs. — with Art., 374, Objective Inf., 501 — Genit., 574, 3, Obs.— Part., 581 ; 361, 9 ; 395. Objective Compp., 359, 3, and Obs,- Genit.,403, 5 b; 413. '■'■ Opinion to be of,'' Yerh, with Inf., 560, 2; 567. Optative, 228— Pres., 2 Pers. Sing, in atia, 233, D. 1 — Perf. Mid., 2S9 -514 — po- tential with av, 517, Obs. 2 ; 552, Obs. — in dep. sent., 524 — Opt.in dep. Sent., 522,etc. —in indir. Speech, 523 — in depend., declar., and inter. Sent, 528— in Sent, of pur- pose, 532— in Sent, of fear, 533— in Condit. Sent., 546, etc.— in Relat. Sent., 555— in tempor. Sent., 556 ; 558 —exp. interest, 430. Ordinal Numbers, 220 — in Ace, 405, Obs. 1. Oxytones, 17— before Enclit., 93 a. Paroxy tones, 11 — \n Crasis, "—before Enclit., 93 c. Participles, Declens., 187 — Voc. Siug.,148— Perf, Act., 276, D. -^em., 188 ; 277, D.— Pres., Aor., and Perf. Mid., 333, 6-10— with Art., 379, etc. ; 578, Obs. — in Dat., 435, Obs. — hypoth. with /u»';, 583,618. Particles, 92, 5 ; 623, etc. Partitive Genitive, 403, 4; 412; 419. Passive, 483 — with Dative, 434— Aor. in Active verbs with Mid. meaning, 328, 3. PRESENT. Patronymics, 348. Peculiar Charact. Suffix, 351 —Genit., 408, 8. "Perccwe," Verbs of, with Genit., 420 ; 417, Obs. — with Infln., 560, 2 — with Part., 591. Perfect, weak, 277, D. ; 280, etc. — strong, 277, etc, — in- trans. meaning, 330— trans, and intrans. meaning, 329 — use of the Ind., 502 — Moods, Inf., Part., 506 — Perfects with Pres, mean- ing, 503.- Period, hypoth., 534 — inter- posed, 550— Negative, 616. Perispomes, 21 — before En- clit., 93 6. Personal Endings, 226— Pro- noun, 250, etc. ; 92, 2 — Meaning, 469— Genit. ,470 a —for reflec. pron., 471, Obs. a, 6— Personal Constr.,571. Place, Suffix of, 345— Genit of, 412 ; 415 ; 425— Dative, 442— Adv. with Genit, 415 — Desig. of, 82, 2 ; 179; 412. Plenty and Want, Adject, of, 414, 2— Verbs, 418. Phiral, 3 Pers. PI. Mid. in -arai, -aro, 226, D. ; 233, D. 6—1 Mid. in fieaOa, 233, D. 5 ; 362, etc. Position, 71, etc. ; 193. Possessive Article, 373 — Pron., 208— with Art., 388 ; 470 — of the reflective, 472 b, c — Poss, exp. by Genit, 408, 2 ; 414, 1— by Dat, 422. Possibiliy,ex\).hy Verb Adj., 300— by Opt with av, 516, etc.; 546 — by Part with iiv, 595. Predicate, 361, 3, etc. — de- pendent, 361, 10; 589, 2 — without Art, 378, 387. Predicative Ace. , 403— Genit , 417— Ace. with Inf., 570— Gen. or Ace, 572 — Part,* 589. Prepositions, lose their Ac- cent, 88— Elision in dissyl., 64; 90; 238— Anastrophe, 90— Augm. aft Prep., 238, etc. — Use, 444 — Adverbial, 446 — with Ace, 449 /— Genit, 451, etc.— Dat, 456, etc.— Genit and Ace, 458 — with three cases, 462, etc. — spurious, 445. Present Ind., 4S6, ete — Moods, Inf. Part, 491 — hist, 487 — exp. by Ind. Aor., 494, Obs. 2— enlarge- ment of, 246— Stem, 231— like the Verb Stem, 247— with lengthened Stem Vowel, 248— from Verb 356 ENGLISH INDEX. PKIMITIVE. Stem with t, 249 — with i, 250, etc. Primitive words, 339. Principal Conjugations, 230 —first, 231, etc. ; 320, etc.— second, 302-319— Declen- sions, 111— first, 112-134— second, 135, Proclitics (see Atoua). '' Prohibition," 518 ; 510; 499 — Prohibit, Hinder, Deny, etc.— have the Infln. with Idf], 617, Obs. 3— with M^; ov, 621 d. Prolepsis, 519, 5, Observ. 2 (Comp.,567; 571). Pronunciation, 4, etc. Proparoxytones, 17 — before End., 93 d. Properispomes, 21 — before Eucl., 93 d. Proper Names in -a, 115, D. 2 — n?, 174— KXr^f, 167— with Art., 371, Obs. ; 375, Obs, ; 387, Obs. "Property," Suffix of, 346; 343, Obs. Quantity, in Crasis, 65 — in Monosyll., 142 — doubtful, 75, D., 1 — reversing quant., 37, D., 2 ; 161, Obs. Quantitative Adj. and Adv., 224— with Art., 374. Questions, dubious in the Subj., 511. Reciprocal Pi'on., 211. Reduplication, 53, 10 a — in the Perf., 273, etc.— in the 2 Aor., 257 d— in Verbs in m, 308. Reflective Pron., 210— Mean- ing, 471— 3d for 1st and 2d Pers., Obs. c — to denote possession, 472 — for Re- ciprocal, 473, Relative Adj., 414. Relative Pron., 213 ; 216 — Crasis,65— Compound,214, Obs. 2— Hypoth., 554— fol- lows the Predic. Subst,, 367 —used once only, 605, RelativeSeutences,551 — with Future Ind., 500— with /u^, 615, Obs. 2— complication, 604— Connection, 605. "Reference to," exp. by the Ace, 404. Rejection of letters, 61— of a "Vowel at begin., see Syn- cope—of a vowel at end, see Elision. Repetition, exp. by the Opt., 547 (Negative, 616, Obs, 2) 555, Obs. 1 ; 558, Obs. 1. SUBJUNCTIVE. Result of an Act, 343— in the Ace, 400 d. Root, 245. "Scare," "Obstruct," a d other Verbs, with the Inf., 560, 3. Semivowels, 31. Sentences, Compound, 519, 3, 5 — Principal, Subordinate, 519, 4— Moods of, 525, etc. — Condit., 534; 549, etc.— Negat., 616 — of Experience in Aor. Ind., 494 — luterr,, 525— of Purpose, 530-533— Negat,, 616. Shortening, at the begiun., 74, D.— of the final syll,, 75, D. 2— in the Perf, 285, D.— in the Subj., 228, D. ; 233, D. 2 — in Rel. Sent., 597, 3. "Should," exp. in depend. Sent, by the Subj., 527 b. Opt., 528 b. "Show,"\erhs of with Part., 693; 580. Sigma, future, 259 ; 260, etc. —Aor., 269. Singular, 3 Pers. in e (i/), 68, 4 — Accent on Imp. Mid., 268, 2 — Accent on 2 Aor. Imper. Act. and Mid., 333, 11, 12, 362. "Space," exp. by the Accus,, 399 b. Spiritus, position, 12; 22 — with p and pp, 13 — Spir, Asper, 60 6— in Augment, 235, Obs.— Spir. Lenis, 11. Stern, 100— St. Vowel length- ened, 147, 2 ; 248 ; 253, Obs. ; 261, 270, changed to e, 157. "Strive," "Aim at," Verbs with Genitive, 419 c — with Inf., 560, 3. Subject, 301, 3— Omitted, Obs. 2— with Genit. Abs., 585 a —of a Subordinate Sent, as Object of the Principal Sent., 397 ; 519, 5— Obs. 2— Subj. of Prin. Sent, in the Subord. Sent., 602 ; 519, 5, Obs. 2. Subjective Genit., 408, 5 a. Subjunctive, 228 — Shortened, 233, D. 2 ; 255, D. 1 ; 302, D. —of the Perf;^id., 289- of verbs in /mi, accent, 309 — Meaning, 508, etc. — similar to Fut,, 513 — in dep. sent., 521 — in depend, assert, and interrog., 527— in sent, of purpose, 531, 532, Obs.— exp. fear, 533 — in condit. sent,, 545, 554, 555, Obs. 2 —in tempo r. sent., 557, 558, Obs. 2. Subordination, 519, 3. Substantive, degrees of, 199, D.— joined to the Dat., 430, Obs., 432, Obs. Suffixes, 340 ; 178. Superlatives, Adv., 203— with Geuit.,416,Obs.2— withwr, 631 a— with 6ti, 633, 1 b. Supplements to the Part., 361, 8, Supplementary Aorist, 270, etc. Syllabic Augm., 234 — with initial vowel, 237 — omit- ted, 283. Syllables of both quantities, 75, D., 1 ; 77. Synizesis, 39 ; 66 ; 243, D., 3. Syncope, 61 c; 257, D. " Taking part in," with Gen- itive, 414, 5 ; 419 a. Temporal Adj., 352, 4, Obs.— Augm., 234 ft; 235. Tenses, 225; 3 Prin. Tenses, 521— Subord., 522— Tense Stems, 227. Tenues, 32— for Aspirate8,-S2, D. Time, in Ace, 399 b; 405 — in Genit., 4-26— in Dat., 443 Adv. of with Genit,, 415— kiuds, degrees of, 484, 1, 2. Transitive and Intransitive Meaning, 329, etc. ; 476— Mid., 477. "Touch," and other Verbs with Genitive, 419 b. UncontracUd Syll., 35, D., 1. Verba Contracta among Iter- atives, 336 d— V. pura, im- pura, 247. Verbal Pred., 361, 4— Nouns, 225, 5 — Stem, 245, etc. — Pres. Stem, 246 ; 260, 3. Vocal Stems, 1 Perf. 280. Vowels, 24, etc. — in divis. of Syll., 470 — before others, 74— long without Augm., 235— Changes, 40, etc.— in 2 Perf, 278— in derivation, 340, Obs. 3. Weakening of Conson., 60. ''iF/ien," expressed by Dat., 443, " Whither," expressed by Ac- cusative, 406, "Wish," expressed in the Opt., 514, etc. Worth and Price, in the Gen- itive, 408, 6; 421. GREEK INDEX a for »i,24,D.2; 41, D.; 115, D.1;121,D.2; 235 D.; 270, Obs. d for n, 277, D. a bee. o), 268; 278— bee. 0,268. abec. M,40; 115,1, c; 116, d; 235; 270; 268; 278; 303, abec. €,37,D.2;169D.; 243, D.3. a bee. ai, 24, D, 3. d from ao, ato, 866 ao, d after e, «, p, 41 ; 115, 1, a; 116, c; 121; ISO; 261; 270; 278. a before vowels, 235, a, connecting vowel, 276 ; 336, D.; 338, D.— in the 3 Plur., 302, 3, a, characteristic of the First or Weak Aorist, 268. a, privative, 360 — in Adj. with the Genit. 414, Obs. 5. -a, ending of the Accus.,141; 156; 173, Obs.; 181; 276. -a, quantity of, 117; 121; 161; 169; 181,1. -a, Plur. ending of Neuters, 125,2; 136; 141; 173. -a, Adverbs in, 202. -a, Nom. of Substant, in, 172. •a, from ao in the Genit., 122, Obs. a'^aOo?, Comparison, 199, 1, a'^aiJ.ai (uydofiai), 312, 8 — Pass, Depon., 328, 2. a^awaKTfcWjWith the Partlcip., 592. ityanu), with the Dative, 439, Obs,— with the Partic.,592. ayteWo/xai, constmed per- 8onally,571— u-yYtWto.with aPartic.,593. 076 6n> 642, 4 a. u^e/pw, 2 Aor., 257, D.— Perf., 275, 1. iiytjoxa, 279. ;p, Masc,,140. at, in the Compar. for o or w, 195— into v, 235. -ai, Elided, '64, D.— Short in regard to the Accent, 83, Obs.2; 108; 229; 268,Obs.l, ai, a'lOe, See ei, ei'^'e. aideofjiat, a'tdoimai, 301, 1 ; 326, 10— Pass. Depon., 328, 2— with the Aceus., 399. 'Ai6n^, 177, D. 19 — ew, ely, "Atdov, 411. aldwi, 163. -aiv, in the Dual, 173, 4. -om-a, Fem. ending, 115, 1 b. alvecx), 301, 3. aivvnai, 319, D. 27, -a(va),Verbs in, 353, 7. ai'f , of both genders, 140. alpeoy, 327, 1— Perf,, 275, D. 1 — Distinct, between Act. and Mid,, 481 b— Passive meaning, 483, 3, a'ipw, Aor., 270, Obs, -a«p, Subst. in, 172. -aiP,intheDat,Pl,,119, a\a-OdvoiJ.at, 322, 11— with the Gen, ,420— with the Partic, 591. alo-xpoy, Comj)arison of, 198. ai, with double Ace., 402. !xKax^t,u>, 319, D. 30. uKCOfxai, 301, 1. uK^Koa, 275,1; 280, Ob aKT)x^^aro, 287, D. aKovo), Perf. Act, 275, 1 — Perf, Mid., 288— with the Num., 392, Obs.— with afxevai, * Gen,, 420, and Obs ^wlth Partic, 591. aKparor.Comparison of,196&, uKpodofxat, Fut,, 261 — with Gen., 420, a/ctoi/, Gen, Abs., 585 b. d\a\Kov, 326, D. 11. aXdXniJiai, 275, D. uXdojuat, Pass. Depon., 328, 2 — Perf., 275, D.l, uXyeivoi, Comparative of, 199, 8. a\di]aKO), 324, D. 30. uXeacOai, 269, D. a\€/0ap,176. uXei;Ao(i/, etc.,211. liXXo/iai, 1 Aor., 270, Obs.— 2 Aor., 316, D. 32. aXXo?, 2il — dXXo ri r] ; oKXo Ti ; 608. aWtof re Ka/, 624, 4. aXi, 150, a\i;<7Ka), 324, 27, Obs. aXxa, 319, 19 — Dis- tinction, 279. uvj-fVoOev, 275, D. avrp, 153 ; 177, 1— Genit., 51, Obs. 2. aviip, 65, Obs. 1. iivO'Siv, 601. avoi-^w, Augm., 237 — Perf., 275, 2 ; 279. iivopOow, double Augm., 240. avra, avrnv, avTiKpv, See aVTi. uvTtxofiat,with Genit., 419 b. apxiv. avTi', 451 — without Ana- strophe, 90. avo), Compar., 204 — with Genit., 415. Hvioya, 517, D. 11— Pluperf., 283, D. a^to?, with Genit., 414, 4 — with Inf., 562. a^ioxpeo}?, 184. ao into d, 37, D. 3 ; 122, D. 2 —into o), 37 : 122, D. 3 c— into €0), 37, D. 2 ; 122, D. 3 b; 132; 243, D. 8. -ao, Genit. Sing., 122, Obs., etc., D. 3 6. aoi, ^nto w, 37. aov, into e&), 243, D. 3 b. uTraYopei'o), with Part., 590. ravrdoo, Fut. Mid. with Act. meaning, 266. una(pi, 250, D. uofxai, with Genit., 422. 1pd(poiJ.ai and 7p«0w, Diff., 4816. 7i'»';;, 177, 5. 6 inserted betw. v and p, 51, Obs. 2; 287, D.; 612— Char- acter, 251. See Dentals. 5ai, 642, 8. 3u<'/ua)i/, of two Genders, 140. daivvfic, 319, D. 32 — Opt., 318, D. dalay, meaning, 330, D. 9. ddKv(o, 321, 8. ddKpvov, 175. Sdfxap, 147, 1, Ex. 5dM»"?M', 312, D. a— Aor. Subj. Pass., 293, D. daveiZ<^, DifF. of Act. and Mid., 481 b. 6ap0dvu, 322, 15. 6uy, Accent, of Genit. PI. and Dual, 142, 3. daTionai, 325, D. 6—1 Aor. Inf., 269, D. -de, affixed, 94; 212; 216— Enclitic, 92, 5— Local Suf- fix, 178. at, 628—5' ovv, 637, 2. S^aTo, 269, D. dkifiai, 312, D. 14, 6. didaov, 324, D. 28 ; 320, D. 40. dtdeyfxai, dt^to, etc., 318, D. dtdia, dedoma, 317, 5, and D. 5ei (see 8e|/u/;Tr)p, 153. dijv, makes position, 77, D. dtjTTOTe, Affix, 218. 6t]Trov, diiTTovOev, 642, 6. -any, Masipo),42^; 440. did^opoi, 436 6. 6i6dKM, with Genit., 422. aMa.c,Gen.Pl.andDual,142,3. :ao/a>, ete,220, D. doKtw, 325, 3— with Inf., 560, 2 — constr. personally, 571. aoKar,Fem.,127, 5. 66^av, Ace Abs., 580. jaapu, 177, 6. \8ovn43e>;9, with Geuit., 414, 2. hdOo), with double Ace, 402 —Meaning, 329, 4. eveiKai {eveUot), 327, D. 12. ti/€Ka, 445 ; 448; 445, 8— with ^ Inf. and Art., 574, 3. eviniM), evveTTC, Ivianu), etc., 327, D. 13. eveprepot, 199, D. (Defect.). ivijvoOev, 275, D. 2. eviivoxa, 327, 12. en, 90. cuttto), 2 Aor., 257, D. fvi, with Geuit., 420. CTcid^riK. hiTiXanfidvopi.ai, tiriXaM^civo- Ma<,withGenit.,419 6,- 420. iTTtKeiiro), with Part., 590. 67r(Mt'Xo/ua«,Depon.Pass.,328. 2— with Genit., 420. eff<0a, 275, D. 2. awfiei', etc., 312, D, 13. -ewv, Genit, of o- Declens., 118, D. tcorC till"), 556; 035, T. tw9,Decl.,163. -ew9, Genit,, 161, Obs. C, Pronunt., 5— Pres. Stems "n, 251, Obs. C'«w, Contract., 244, 2. Ce, Local Suffix, 178. ^eu-yi/K/ut, 819, 16. /.evi,in,l. Cew, 301,1. CnX6fc),withAcc,, 398. Co), Char, of Verbs, 251, Obs. andD — Fut, 260,3. Comp. 203. J^iovvvfit, 319,9. 362 GREEK INDEX. », for d, 24, D. 1; 115, D. 2;! ISO, D.; 244, 2; 161, D.;! 270, Obs. See e. I t] after o.lSO, Ex.— bee. )ae, 024 6, 2. V«. ^v, ^, 312, 1. ^Mo?, 556: 634,4. riij.iTiarxov, 323, 36. inintXaCKov, 324, 23. rifJ^i?, Prop. Names in, 174. 'm, Adj. in, 355 — Comp., 197. -»;e6r,Voc. Sing., 129, D. Otpetoi, 350. Oipofiai, Fut., 262, D. • t^tw, 248— Fut., 260, 2. ^^n^iT, as Fem., 185, Obs. ei]v, Enclit., 92, 5 ; 643, 17. Onpaa, with Aceus., 398. Oi bee. CO-, 57. -Oi, Loc. Suff.,178, 1— Ending of 2P.Imper.,228; 302,5; 807. Oif-idvui, 322, 24. exdo), 301, 1. OviiaKoi, 324, 4— Perf., 317, 3— Perf. Part., 276, D.— 3 Fut., 291— Siguif.,486,Obs. Oo]iJidTiov, 65, Obs. 1. eopvvpiai, 324, D. 15. ^Pif,54a; 145. 6 pinna), 54 f'. OpwaKoy, 59 ; 324, 15. (/i/7«Tnp, 153. ev- npo- Ovfjieofiai, Dcpon. Pass., 328, 2. 6»^pdo-<(i/),179. Oufo, 301, 2— Aor. Pass., 53, 10 6. 6>a.9,Genit., PI. and Du.,142, 3. J, Pronnnt., 4— Long by Nat., 83, Obs. 1 — Lengthened, 253, Obs.— r bee. .-, e<, oi, 40 ; 278—. of the Stem bee. e, 157— Changes, 55; 168; 250, etc. -I, Locative Ending, 179 — Demonst., 212— Neat, in, 139; 172. -I, Nom. Ending in the PI., 134, 9 — Dat. Sing., 141; 173, 2. I, Sign of the Opt., 22S-Ke- dupl.,308; 327, D. 17— Con- nect. Vowel, 348; 351— Af- fixed to the Stem in the Dat. PL, 119; 134,8. I, Subscribed, 8; 12; 27; 65, Obs. 2— Dat. Sing., 134, 3; 169 ; 173, 2. I, Verbs in the Pres. with, 250, etc.; 822, Obs. — their Fut., 260,3; 262. la for to, 348. -la, Fern, in, 346, 3; 185, ete. i'a, iTi^, ifj, tw, 220, D. 1. IdoMoj, Meaning of the Aor. Pass., 328, 4. laCio, 327, D. 17. -mw, Verbs in, 353, Obs. 2. ide (Couj.),624 b, 1— (Imper.), 827,8; 333,12. -idiov, Neut. in, 347, 1, Obs, 'idi or,wit h Genit. , 414, 1— wi th Dat., 436 6. «apir,158; 189,3. idpvu), Aor. Pass,, 298, D. Idpwi, 169, D. lepoi, with Genit., 414, 1. lC«i'a),822,17. 't^otxat, 326, 21. -i, 642, 4 a. KatVu/ia*, 319, D. 33. Kaiirep, with Part., 587, 5. KaiTOi, 630, 6 ; 94. Kaioi, 35, Obs.; 263, Obs Future, 260, 2—1 Aorist, 269, D. KaKov \tyo), KaKwt 5ro£ta),with Acc.,402; 896. KaKoi, Compar., 199, 2. «a\6a),301,3. Ka\69, Compar., 199, 6. Kd/jivo^, 321, 9— Perfect, 282— with Ace, 400 & — with Part., 590. Kai'eoi', Kavovv, 131, 3. K«pa, 177, D. 22. Kaprepto), with Part., 590. Kara, 448; 459— Apocope, 64, D. — with Inf. and Art., 574, 2. KaTairXiiTTO/jiai, with AcC, 399. Karrjyopto), Augm., 239. Kara), Compar., 204. Ke7ai, etc., 269, D. KeliJiai, 314, 2. Keli/or, see eKeTvo^. Keipa, Fut., 262, D. K6KacrMa',320,D. 33. KtKXniJiai, Meaning, 503. KtKTt^fjiat, 274, Ex. — Moods, 289— Meaning, S03. , KeXade'o). 325, D. e. KeXeuo), Perf., 288. «6\\a),FHt.,266,Es. KeXofiat, Aor., 257, D. «e(v), 68, D.— Enclit., 92, 5. See ttf. Kevrea, 825,1}./. Kepdvvvnt, 31^, 1— Sub. Mid., 312, D. 16. Kepdaivw, Aor., 270, Obs. — Perf., 322, Obs. KeffKCTo, 337, D. Krai, etc., 209, D. Kiidu), 326, D. 41. KKpv^, S3, Obs. 1 ; 145. KiK\t]ffKM, 324, D. 31. Kivunai, 319, D. 34. Kipvn^xi, 312, D. &. K(x«i/a), 321,18. K.xMM', 313, D. 6 ; 322, 18. k/xpiM<. 312, 7. 1/, etc., 319, D. 34. K\aCw» 251, Obs. — Meaning of the Perf. Act., 276, D. KXa/o), 253, Obs.; 326, 22 — Fut., 260, 2. KAdo), 301,1. KXe/fjAcCjlSG. KAe/o), KAjio), Perf. Mid., 288. KXtTTTn?, 'Compar., 197. KXtTTTw, Perfect, 279— Aorist Pass., 295. kXts, Proper Names in, 167; 174. kA/i/o), Perf., 282. kAuo), Aor., 316, D. 27. Kvuu), Contr., 244, 2. i/.Vffr),115,D.2. Koiv6, 326, 28. veto, 24S— Fut., 260, 2. vi,, 643, 15. w'Co), 251, Obs. iiKaoi 'oXufjiiria, 400 c — Mean- ing, 486, Obs. wi/,205,D. ^ uTTo-, dia-, €v-, Ttpo- voiofiat, Dep. Pass., 328, 2. i/o/u«Cw, with Genitive, 417 — with Inf., 569. -vof, Adj. in, 352, Obs. i/oo-ew.Diflf. of Pres. and Aor., 498. voaoi. Fern., 127, 5, -vTi, 3 Plur. of Princ. Tenses Act, 226. -vrwv, 3 PI. Imper. Act., 228. -vv affixed to Verb.-Stems, 804, 2 ; 318, 1, vvixat.Pl.,128,D. oiVoj, ett., 327, 12. oixofxai, oix>'tw, 326, 31, and D.— Meaning, 486, Obs with Part., 590. oXeKo), 319, D. 20. o\t7o?, Compar., 199, 4. o\i7a)pe'&), with Genit, 420. hXiaOdvu), 322, 20. oWvut, 319, 20— Meaning of Perf., 329, 9; 503 — Itera- tive, 337, D. oXof, Position, 390. *O\i^M'''»a,400 c. o/itXew, with Dat., 436 a. ofivvnt, 319, 21 — with the ^ Ace, 399. o/io<09, onotoofiat, o/xoXo^t'o), oyuoi;, etc., with Dat., 436 a, 6, c. 6fio\oy4ofxai, constr. person- ally, 571. oidop'fvvfMi, 319, 22. 6fiuivv/j.o'/, with Verbs of Fearing, 533, Obs. opao), 327, 8 — Double Augm., 237— Perf., 327, 8; 275, D.l —with Part., 591. opfaivoi, Aor., 270, Obs. opiyvvm, 319, D. 30. ope-fofjiat, with Genit., 419 c. opeovTo, 320, D. 37. opwf , 177, 12— Ace. Sing., 156. iipwijit, 319, D. 37—2 Aorist Mid., 316, D. 38. opovTai, 327, D. 8. op6m, 243, D. 3 a. Spaeo, 268, D. opvGCTo), Perf., 275, 1. opwpa, 320, D. 37. -09, Neuters in, 243, 2, and Obs. ; 139; 172— Ending of Genit., 141 ; 157, D. ; 173, 8,1. . o9, Relative, 213— Demonst. 212, D.; 213, Obs., and D.— for the Possess, of 1 and 2 Pers., 471, Obs. c; 208, D, oaw, Attr., 600— cffov, 601— oaov ov, 622, 5. oaaaTio?, 216, D. 6'aae, 177, D. 25. oCTTiy, 94—214, Obs. 2— offTt? and 6(TTiiovv,Me£in., 600. IxTtppaivo/iai, 822, 21, and Obs. ore, orav, 556; 634, 1— with Aor. Ind., 493 — "as often as," 558, Obs. 1. on and o Ti, 214, Obs. 2. oTt, 633, 1— without Elision 64, Obs. 1 — in Dependent Declarative Sentences, 525 — oTt lit], 633, 1 b. 6rin, 218. St.9, 214, D. ov from o. See o.' -ou, Genitive ending, 122, 2 ; 128; 134, 2-Conn. Vowel, 233, 1—2 Pers. Sing. Imper. . and Imperf. Mid., 233, 5. ov, ovK, ovx, 69, Obs. 1 ; 52, D. — Atonons, 97.4; 612, etc. —with Prohibitives, 499, Obs.— in questions,60S — ov tap, ov yap aWd, 636, 6 d. — ov 6rira, 642, 6 — ovk iipa, 637, 1—ov fxiu 620— ou /u^" (juevTOi) aWd, 622, 6 — ov {Xovov-uWcc Kal, 624, 6. ov, ol, J-', etc., Meaning, 471, Obs. b. oi5e,625, 1. oidek, 221— Attr., (J02—ov6ev, 622, 1. o^K6T<,622, 2. ovKovv and ovKovv, Diff. 99 ; 637, 2. ov\6fxevof, 319, D. 20. olv, 637, 2— Atfixed, 218. -oyv, Ace. Sing., 163, D. ovveKa, 636, 3. o£,?, 65, D. Trutrxo). oiVo), 622, 2. ovptio. Augment, 237. -01/9, Adj. in, 183; 352, 4— Nom. of Subs., 172. ol?, 177, 13 ; 142, 8 — Neut., 140. ouTuoj.Aor., 316, 20, D. ovTe,94 — ovTe-ovTe,ovTe-ovde, 625, 2, and Obs. oUti, 622, 1. ovToi, 643, 10. ouT09,,212; 475;— in address- ing, 393— ouToo-;, 212. o[;T, Aor. 257, D.— 2 Aor. Mid., 316, D. 40. nav, 142, 6— in Compos, be- fore or, 49, Obs. 1. ■7ravT(ina,withGenit.,419 e. Trape'xw and wapexoMa'. 480. Trape'xw, with Inf., 561. napoivfo}, double Aug., 240. wapov, 586. ndpov, 565 : 635, 12. nappnTid^onai, Augm., 239. 7ru9, Genit. and Dat. Accent., 142, 2— meaning with and . without Art., 390, and Obs. Trdaau), 250, Obs.- Fut. 260, 3. Trdaacov, 198, D. Trdcrxo), 32Y, 9— Perf,, 317, D. 14. / 366 GEEEK INDEX. Trareojuaj. irareoiJiai, 325, 7. ]p, 153. iravonai, Aorist, 298 — with Genit., 419 e— with Part. mean., 590. irelOa, Aorist, 257, D.— Perf., 317, D. 15— Fut. aud Aor. Part., 326, D. 43 —Mean- ing, 330, 3 ; 503. ireivdu), Contr., 244, 2. TretVojaai, 327, 9. neKdC(a,l Aor. Imper., 268, D. jreXeKy?, Masc, 140 ; 157. nenTTu, Perf., 279. Trevn?, Compar., 192 — with Genit., 414, 2. ireiToi0a, 317, D. 15. nenovOa, 317, D. 14. 7re7rpa7a and irtirpaxo-, DiffL, 330. ireTT p(i}Tai, 285, D. weTTTa/xat, 274, Ex. weTTTto/ca, 274, Ex. ; 327, 15. jrenoiKa, 327, 10. irenojv, Coinpar., 196 a. jrep, 641, 3— Enclit., 92, 5 — Affix, 218. wepa, with Genit, 415— Corn- par., 200. jrepdoi, 326, 33. irepOoi, 2 Aor., 257, D. ; 59, D. —Aor. Inf. Mid., 316, D. 41. nepi, 448, III. ; 466— without Elision,64,Obs.l-Anastr., 446— Adverb, ibid.—with. Augm,, 238. irepi/3dX\oiJiai, with double Ace, 402. Tceptfiyvofxat, irepleiiJit, with Genit., 423. nepvnm, Part., 312, D. e. ir€pvcn{v), 68, 3. Treffetv, 327, 15. weo-ffw, 250, Obs. neTuvvvfxi, 319, 3. nerewf, Genit. Sing., 131, D. neronai, 326, 34— 2 Aor., 61 c; 257, D.; 316,5. TtevOoixai, 322, 29. Tre^i/ov, 257, D. •Keipvi^oTc^, 277, D. ff^, Enclit., 92, 4. nnyvvpLi, 319, 23 — 2 Aorist Mid., 316, D. 39— Meaning. 830,4. wnv/Ka, with Genit., 415. TTJJxi'r, Masc.,140; 154. ffteCew, 7rjtCw,325,D. A. nWc, 316, 15. TrtXi/ajuat, Aor., 312, D.f. TrjMTAnM', 312, 3— with Gen- itive, 418. ninnprifxi, 312, 4. tt/vo), 321, 4 ; 327, 10— Future, 265— Aor., 321, 4; 316,15— Meaniug,329,7— with Gen- itive, 419 d, and Obs. niofxa,, 265; 327,10. iriTtiaKca, 324, 20. TrpaTTCi), ■mirpdaKOi, 324, 7. tt/ttto), 327, 15 — Perf. Part., 317, D. 17. nlavpe;9, Gen., PI. and Du., 142, 3. aO, after Cons. , 61 a ; 286, 4. - with Genitive, 419 c. arpe;p,Voc. Sing., 152. T, Prounnt., 4— bee. 9, 54 — becomes ff,60a; 67; 187— dropped, 147, 2 ; 169 — in the Perfect, 281— changes before, 286, 3 — affixed to Verb. Stem, 249— movable, 169, D. rdv, Defect., 177, 10. Tdn;Ma«,319,D.38. Tcixa, 212 — tJ(i/ TUXtTTtlV, 405, Obs. 2. raxt'i, Compar. 0d<7ffco^, 54 &; 198. -T6, 2 Pers. Plur. Act., 226— 2 Plur. Imper. Act., 22S. -re, 624 6 — Enclit, 92, 5 — Affix, 94 ; 624, 5 — rt-Kai, 76-6e, 024, 2, and Obs. reOvi^^oi, 291. 7etv, 205, D. Te/wo), Perfect, 282—1 Aorist Pass., 298. -re/pa, Fem., 341, 2. Teiifxr]piov 6i, 636, 6 b. reXeo), 301, 1— Perf. Mid., 288. Tf/u£., 321, D. 10. Tfyui/w, 321, 10. T60, rev, Tfo), etc., 214, D. reoi, 208, D. -reo?, Verb. Adj., 300; 590— with Dat., 434. -T6po9, Compar., 192 ; 208, Obs.; 216. ripnonai, Aorist, 59, D. ; 257, D. ; 295, D.— with Partic, 592. TCTa'^wv, 257, D. reruKa, 282. TtrXn/ca, 317, D. 10. TtT/iov, 257, D. rerpaivu), Aor., 270, Obs. TtTpnxa. 277, D. TeTi-Keli/, 322, D. 30. T£i''x«, 322, 30 — Perf. Mid., 285, D. • Tr,KU), Meaning, 330, 7. TM^'Koi/TOS', TTi^iKoide, 212 ; 475. -rm. Ending of the 3 Person Dual of the Hist. Tenses, Act., 226— of the 2 Person Dual, 233, D. 7. -Tnp, Masc. in, 341, 2 ; 137. --npiof, Neut. in, 345, 1. -Tr79, Nom. of Masc. in, 341, 2 ; 349, 2— Voc. Sing., 121 —Nom. of Fem. in, 346, 1 ; 138. Ti bee. aa-, 57— inserted in Derivation, 361. 368 GEEEK INDEX. 'Ti, 3 Pers. Sing. Act. iu the Princip. Tenses, 226. Tt ; why ? 404, Obs. — t« 7dp ; 636, 6d — Ti dn; 642, 4 a — Tt dfjirov ; 642, 5 — ri 8hra ; 642, 6— rt ij.a0wv ; t< iraOiuv ; 606, Obs. 2 — t« /i>ji/ ; 643, 12. rin, 218. riOnui, Aor. Pass., 53 &. TtKTd), 249. Tj/i"". with Genit., 421. Tilj.u)peojj.ai and -fco), 481 & — -eofjiai, with Acc, 396. T/Vi^M'. 319, D. 35. fivw, 321, 5. riTTTe, 61, D. T/pwi/r, 50 b, Obs. 2. -T«,Nom. Fern., 341,2; 342,1. t/?, t/, 214— for orTif, 609. T/y, Ti, 214— End., 92, 1— T/^a, to be supplied, 568. T(Tpda), 327, 16. rtrpuxTKU), 324, 16. rnvaKofiai, 322, D. 30; 324, D.37. rXTivat, etc., 316, 6. TM-ta, 321, D. 10. TO, 879, Obs.; 104; 559 6— t6 /Liei/, to 6i, 369, Obs. — to irpt'i/, 635, 11. ToOi, ToOev, Tto?, 217, D. Tot, 643, 10— Eucl., 92, 5. Toi'^ap, roi'iapoiiv, rof^apTOi, 643, 10; 637, 5 — toivvv, 637, 4. Tolo, etc., 212, D. TOioi/Tor, Toiorde, 212; 475. Toir6e<7«,212,D. toXm", 115 (Ex.). -Toi/. 2 and 3 Pers. Du. Act., 226—3 Pers. Dual Imperf., 233, D. 7—2 Pers. Du. Im- perf., 228. -Tor, Verbal Adj. in, 300. Tooroi'Tos', rocToide, 212 ; 475. TOTe, with Part., 587, 4. rov, Tw, 214, Obs. 1. -Tpa for -Tep in the DatPlur,, 153. • -Tpa, Fem. iu, 344, Obs. TpeTTO), 2 Aorist Act., 257 — 2 Aorist Pass., 294— Perf., 279; 285. Tp(:0w,54 c— Perf., 279 ; 285— Aor. Pass., 295— Aor. Act. Meaning, 329, D. Tp^;xw,54c; 327,11. Tpt]ao}, 327, 16. -Tpm, Fem. in, 341, 2— Quan- tity, 117. Tpivpn9, Genit. PI., 166. -Tp, 324, D. 16. TT, -TTW, see , 54 c. rvxdv, 322, 30. -TO), -Twv, 3 Pers. Sing, and Du. Imper. Act., 228. -Twp, Norn. Masc. iu, 341,- 2 ; 137. -TWffai/, 3 Pers. Plur. Imper. Act., 228. V bee. F, 35, D. 2 ; 160 ; 248, Obs.— bee. a, 40 — bee. cv, 40; 278 — bee. ov, 40, D.— of the Stem bee. e, 157— Long by nature, 83, Obs. 1 —lengthened, 253, Obs.— dropped, 253 — not drop- ped, 64. ri/, Neut. in, 139; 172. 6/3p<'Cw, with Acc, 396. v/3piaTi]i, Compar., 197. -v8p,ov, Neut. in, 347, Obs. 1. uSwp, 176— Neut., 140. i/e bee. 0, 158. VI, Diphth., 28. -via, Fem. of Perf. Partic, 188. v\6i, 177, 17. vjjiiv, v/jiiv, etc., 207 — iifioi, 208, D. -vv, Nom. of Masc and Neut. iu, 172. -uvw.Verbs in, 353,8. inai, see vno. uTraTO?, 200. hittp (bneip), 448, II.,*A. ; 460 —with Inf. and Art, 574, 3. virttrxvov/Jiai, 323, 30 — with Inf., 569. hno, 448, III.; 468— Apoc., 64, D. vnoTTTevco, Augm., 239. -w, Nom. Masc. and Fem., 172 — Barytones in Acc. Sing., 156. vanivt), Dat. Sing., 175, D. UCTTepoc, vararof, vaTUTio^, 200 : 199, D. vffTepo^, varepta, with Gen., 416, Obs. 3; 423. 0t]v, 521,1). ipaeivoi, Superl., 193, D. (paivo), (paeivu),32l, D.— Perf., 282— Meaning, 330, 8— Aor. Pass., 298, D. — Meaninc:, 828, 3 — Diff. of Pres. and Aor., 498. (jyaivoixai, (pavepos e/jut, With Part., 590. (puaKbi, 324, 8. tptaTOS, 199, D. 1. ^epo), 327, 12— Imperat. of 1 Aor. Act., 268, D.— Mean- ing, 476, 2—0uL', 321, 3—2 Aor., 316, 7 — with Acc, 898 — with Part., 590. (pOe'tpui, Perf., 282— Meaning, 330, D. 11. eivu>, 321, 6— Aor. Mid., 316, D.26. i\tui, 825, D. 1. 0tXor, Compar., 195. (p(\oTifiionai, Dep. Pass., 828, 2. -0^(1/), 178, D. (po/Sovfiat, Meaning of Aor., 828,3— with Inf., 500, 3. ^olwf , 83, Obs. 1 ; 145. (poprivai, see i. (ppayvvpn, ipcip-yvvfjit, 319, 26. 0paCw,Aor.,257,D. ippiap, 176. (ppijv, Fem., 140. (piifade, 178, D. ipvfjdvM, 322, 81, and Obs. -^y^?,Adj. in,Acc. Sing.,166. )pi^, 455, 5. ^, 34 ; 48 ; 260, -\/^, Subs, in, 172. Vauo), Perf. Mid., 288— with Genit, 419 6. ^au), Contr., 244, 2. ^tiidonai, with Genit., 419 e. o), for o, 276, D.— See Att. Declens. — from o, see o— from n, see n. -ft), Fern, in, 138— Nom., 172 — Adv. in, 204 — Proper Names in Ace. Sing.,163,D. —in the Genit., 122, D. 3 c —Conn. Vowel, 233, 1—1 Pers. Sin^. Ind. Act., 233,2. Zi'iixat, 327, D. 6. -odn?, Adj. in, 359, 2 Obs. e^(^, 325, 9 — Syll. Augm., 237. \Ao«,65, D. w/dfiai, 327, S, -ft)i/,Nom. ofMasc. andFem., 172; 345, 3 — Genit., 118; 134, 7 ; 141 : 173, 5. a)i/d/u»)i/, etc., 3' 4, D. livaf ,-65, D. ?, 217. (5,9 and wi, Diff., 99 ; 217, D. ; 031. iixpeXov. w?, Atonon, 97, 3; 98— with Compar., 631 a — with Inf., u)? eiTreii/, tor to hvv eivat, etc. ,564 — "as ihough,"etc., with Part., 588— "when," "as," 556— with Aor.Ind., 493— "that," in Dependent Declarative Sentences, 525 — "in order that," in Sen- tences of Purpose, 530 — with av, 031 b, Obs. — iu expressing a wish, 514. (is, Preposit., 445 ; 448, A. ; 450. (icTrep, 032— with Part., 588. (iirre, 94; 560; 632, 4— with Inf., 566— joined with fxij, 617, Obs.^2. (tiTor, see ovf. cou, Diphth., 26, D. a)uT(3r,etC.,209, D. lixpeXta, with Acc, 396. DtO 14 ^9S9 ^'9 aosEPWAi j*>c»V^'' v?,^^"^ DEC is REC'D Uo lECDCD JUN 3 73 -9 AM 9^ LD 21-100m-l,'54(1887sl6)476 THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY